JP5938022B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the start condition being satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. And a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player after the variable information display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, variable display is performed by updating or scrolling predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as LCD). There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result (variable display result).

  As an example of the variable display game, the variable display of the display symbol is completely stopped based on the detection of the game ball passing through the starting winning opening (the variable display start condition is satisfied). In some cases, the case where the stop symbol mode (variable display result) is a specific display mode determined in advance is called “big hit”. In this variable display game, when it is a “big hit”, a special electric accessory called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. . Such a state is referred to as a “specific game state” or a “hit game state”. In addition, the predetermined variable display state that may be a “big hit” in the variable display game is “reach” (also referred to as “reach state”), and the variable display state of the display symbol is “reach” There are known gaming machines that perform various production operations.

  As such a gaming machine, for example, according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, the temporary stop is temporarily performed in a stop symbol form different from the set final stop symbol form, and the game is restarted until the stop in the final stop symbol state. By executing the variable display (pseudo continuous variation) a predetermined number of times and displaying a character image with a higher expectation of big hit each time this pseudo continuous change is performed, it is possible for the player to make the variable display result a big hit. There has been proposed one that raises expectations (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2001-000680 A

  However, with the technique described in Patent Document 1, if the number of times of pseudo continuous variation is large, the player can have a sense of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit with respect to the reach that occurs thereafter. However, if the number of pseudo-variable changes is small, the player cannot have such a sense of expectation for the reach that has occurred thereafter. Was also invited.

This invention has been made in consideration of the above, it fueled expectations Yu technique's, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the game playability.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention varies the identification information based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined No in step S231). And after the variable display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol or a final stop symbol that becomes a big hit combination), an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player Determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing in step S110), for example, to determine whether or not to enter the advantageous state. , together with the start of variable display of decorative identification information deriving display the display result in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, the variable display is started of the identification information Et al., Until the variable display result of the identification information is derived displayed, the variable display of the identification information without temporarily stopped, is again variable display from the temporary stop the variable display of the decorative identification information Pseudo continuous variable display executing means for executing pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific effect of “pseudo continuous” in the decorative symbol changing process in step S162), and the pseudo continuous variable display. When the pseudo-variable display is executed by the variable display executing means, the notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect that develops the effect in stages (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs “decorative symbol variation processing in step S162” The portion that executes the notice effect of the “step-up image”) and the effect means (for example, the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect) that can execute the predetermined effect in a plurality of types. Lamp 9 and the like, and production control means (for example, the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14) that cause the production means to execute a predetermined production in a manner corresponding to the number of times of pseudo-variable display execution, When the variable display result of the identification information is started after the variable display result of the identification information different from the specific display result is derived and displayed, the effect control means performs the first pseudo continuous variable display. It is possible to cause the effect means to execute a predetermined effect in the same manner as when it is started (for example, the variable display result is lost and the variable display mode becomes a non-reach mode, and the special symbols and decorative symbols can be displayed in a variable manner. When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is executed subsequent to execution, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, as shown in FIG. The board 13 performs control to output the sound of “do” from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lamp control board 14 performs control to turn on one of the three game effect lamps 9).

(2) In the gaming machine described in the above (1), each time the pseudo continuous variable display is executed by the pseudo continuous variable display executing means, a plurality of types of effect images are switched in a predetermined order to be a variable display device. Further provided is a notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect to be displayed (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect of “step-up image” in the decorative symbol variation process in step S162).

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, execution for storing the number of executions of variable display of the identification information, including the number of executions of pseudo continuous variable display by the pseudo continuous variable display execution means It further includes a number storage means (for example, a total variation number counter, etc.), and the effect control means changes the identification information after the variable display result of the identification information different from the specific display result is derived and displayed. When the display is started, control is performed to cause the effect means to execute a predetermined effect in a manner corresponding to the number of execution times (for example, once) stored in the execution number storage means (for example, special symbols and decorations). When the variable display of the symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the sound control board 13 performs control to output the sound of “do” from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lamp Performs control to light up one of the control board 14 has three game effect lamp 9).

(4) In order to achieve the above object, each gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is identified based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (for example, No is determined in step S231). A plurality of possible types of identification information (for example, special symbols) are variably displayed (for example, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B, the image display device 5, etc.), and the variable information display result of the identification information is determined in advance. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player after becoming a big hit symbol (for example, a final stop symbol that becomes a big hit combination). Thus, prior determination means (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make the variable display result of the identification information the specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed). Between the start of variable display of the identification information and the derivation display of the variable display result corresponding to the determination result by the prior determination means. The pseudo continuous variable display execution means for executing the pseudo continuous variable display for the variable stop display after the temporary stop display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the specific effect of “pseudo continuous” in the decorative pattern changing process in step S162. , Etc.), a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of modes (for example, a game effect lamp 9), and the light emission in a mode corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous variable display is executed by the pseudo continuous variable display executing means. A light emission control means (for example, a lamp control board 14) for notifying the player of the number of times of execution of the pseudo-variable display by controlling the light emission of the means. The light emission control means performs control to cause the light emission means to emit light in a mode different from the mode corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variable display by the pseudo continuous variable display execution unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the player is notified of the number of times that the pseudo continuous variable display is executed (for example, when the first pseudo continuous variation is started, as shown in FIG. Control is performed so that two of the three game effect lamps 9 are lit, and when the second pseudo-continuous variation is started, control for lighting all three game effect lamps 9 is performed as shown in FIG. Do).

(5) In order to achieve the above object, each gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is identified based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied (for example, it is determined No in step S231). A plurality of possible types of identification information (for example, special symbols) are variably displayed (for example, the special symbol display devices 4A, 4B, the image display device 5, etc.), and the variable information display result of the identification information is determined in advance. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player after becoming a big hit symbol (for example, a final stop symbol that becomes a big hit combination). Thus, prior determination means (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make the variable display result of the identification information the specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed). Between the start of variable display of the identification information and the derivation display of the variable display result corresponding to the determination result by the prior determination means. The pseudo continuous variable display execution means for executing the pseudo continuous variable display for the variable stop display after the temporary stop display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the specific effect of “pseudo continuous” in the decorative pattern changing process in step S162. And the like, a light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of modes (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the light emission in a mode corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous variable display is executed by the pseudo continuous variable display executing means. A light emission control means (for example, a voice control board 13) for notifying the player of the number of times of execution of the pseudo-variable display by performing a control to emit the means. The light emission control means performs control to cause the light emission means to emit light in a mode different from the mode corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variable display by the pseudo continuous variable display execution unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, the player is notified of the number of times that the pseudo continuous variable display is executed more frequently (for example, when the first pseudo continuous variation is started, as shown in FIG. When control is performed to output “L” sound from 8L and 8R and the second pseudo continuous fluctuation is started, “M” sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as shown in FIG. Control).

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), when it is determined by the prior-decision unit that the control is not performed in the specific gaming state, the identification information Reach determining means for determining whether or not to set the variable display state to the reach state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S265 to S268), a determination result by the prior determination means, and a determination by the reach determination means Based on the result, variable display pattern type determining means for determining the variable display pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types (for example, after the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271) , A part for executing the processing of steps S272 and S273, etc.), the determination result by the prior determination means and the reach determination Variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process in step S111) that determines the variable display pattern of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result by the means; The variable display pattern type determining means further comprises a plurality of variable display pattern types (for example, normal CA2-1, corresponding to the reach state) when the reach determining means determines that the reach state is set. (E.g., the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S270 after executing the processing of step S270), and the reach determination means When a decision is made not to reach the reach state, A plurality of variable display pattern types (for example, non-reach CA1-1) including variable display pattern types (for example, non-reach CA1-4 variation pattern types) that execute the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined number of times during variable display of identification information. To CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to CC1-3, etc. (for example, the CPU 103 executes steps S271 and S273 after executing the process of step S271). The variable display pattern determining means determines that the variable display pattern of the identification information is determined as the variable display pattern type when the reach determination means determines that the reach state is set. Multiple types of reach variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the means (for example, normal PA2-1 to PA2-4, super PA3-2 to PA3-8, PB3-1, PB3-2, PC3-1, PC3-2 variation pattern, etc.) (for example, the CPU 103 determines in step S274). After the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is set, the processing of steps S275 and S276 is executed), the reach determination unit determines that the reach state is not set, and the variable display pattern type determination unit When the variable display pattern type for executing the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined number of times is determined, the variable display pattern of the identification information is converted into a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns for executing the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined time ( (For example, non-reach PA1-4 to PA1-7 fluctuation pattern, etc.) In response to the determination of the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 in step S273, the CPU 103 sets the loss variation pattern determination table 138A in step S274, and then executes the processes in steps S275 and S276. To do).

  The present invention has the following effects.

With the gaming machine described in the above (1), presentation control means, subsequent to that variable display results that differ from the specific display results derived displayed, when the variable display is started, 1 It is possible to cause the effect means to execute a predetermined effect in the same manner as when the second pseudo continuous variable display is started. Thus, even when not actually pseudo continuous variable display in the execution, combined with the previous variable display, the results can be as if pretend as if the pseudo continuous variable display is running, variable display results since it is possible to stir the player's expectation for it to become a specific display result, it is possible to improve the Yu technique interest.
Further, the notice effect executing means executes a notice effect that develops the effect in stages when the pseudo continuous variable display is executed by the pseudo continuous variable display executing means . Thus, it is possible to improve the Yu technique interest.

  In the gaming machine described in the above (2), every time the pseudo-prediction variable execution means executes the pseudo-continuous variable display by the pseudo-continuous variable display execution unit, a plurality of types of effect images are switched according to a predetermined order and variably displayed. A notice effect to be displayed on the device is executed. As a result, an effect image corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variable display by the pseudo continuous variable display executing means can be displayed on the variable display device. As a result, not only the effect means but also the variable display device is used. Since the player can feel the expectation that the variable display result of the identification information becomes the specific display result, it is possible to improve the game interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine described in (3) above, when the variable display result of the identification information is started after the variable display result of the identification information different from the specific display result is derived and displayed, Control for causing the effecting means to execute a predetermined effect in a manner corresponding to the number of executions stored in the execution number storage means is performed. In this way, the effect control means accurately determines the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variable display by causing the effect means to execute a predetermined effect in a manner determined based on the number of executions stored in the execution number storage means. It is possible to notify the player of the number of executions of variable display of decorative symbols including

  According to the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the light emission control unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the number of times of the pseudo continuous variable display execution by the pseudo continuous variable display execution unit. The player is notified of the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variable display by performing the control of causing the means to emit light. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, by performing control to cause the light emitting unit to emit light in a mode different from the mode corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variable display by the pseudo continuous variable display executing unit, The player is notified of the number of times that is greater than the number of times of continuous variable display. As described above, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the player is notified of the number of times that the actual pseudo-variable variable display is executed more frequently, so that the variable display result of the identification information becomes the specific display result. The player's sense of expectation can be raised, so that the player's gaming interest can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine described in (5) above, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the sound control unit performs sound in a manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo continuous variable display is executed by the pseudo continuous variable display executing unit. By performing control to output sound from the output means, the player is notified of the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variable display. On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, control is performed to output sound from the sound output means in a manner different from the aspect corresponding to the number of times of pseudo continuous variable display execution by the pseudo continuous variable display execution means. Thus, the player is notified of the number of times that is greater than the number of times that the pseudo continuous variable display is executed. As described above, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the player is notified of the number of times that the actual pseudo-variable variable display is executed more frequently, so that the variable display result of the identification information becomes the specific display result. The player's sense of expectation can be raised, so that the player's gaming interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine described in the above (6), the variable display pattern type determining means performs pseudo continuous variable display during the variable display of the identification information in response to the determination that the reach determination means does not enter the reach state. Is determined as one of a plurality of variable display pattern types including a variable display pattern type for executing the predetermined number of times. At this time, the variable display pattern determining means executes the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined number of times for the variable display pattern of the identification information in response to the fact that the variable display pattern type is determined to execute the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined time. Therefore, one of a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns is determined. Thereby, even when the variable display state of the identification information does not reach the reach state, the pseudo-continuous variable display can be executed a predetermined number of times, enabling various effects and improving the game entertainment.
Further, the variable display pattern type determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display pattern types corresponding to the reach state in response to the determination that the reach state is set to the reach state. Corresponding to the determination that the reach state is not set by the reach determining means, the variable display pattern type including a variable display pattern type for executing the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined number of times is determined. Then, the variable display pattern determining means responds to the decision to reach the reach state by the reach determining means, and the plurality of types of reach included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means. While one of the variable display patterns is determined, it is determined that the reach state is not set, and the variable display pattern type determining unit determines the variable display pattern type to execute the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined number of times. Correspondingly, one of a plurality of types of non-reach variable display patterns for executing the pseudo continuous variable display a predetermined number of times is determined. As described above, the variable display pattern type determination unit and the variable display pattern determination unit make different determinations depending on whether or not the reach determination unit determines to reach the reach state. Therefore, as the numerical data indicating the random value used for determining the variable display pattern type, common numerical data can be used regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, and the variable display pattern of the identification information As the numerical data indicating the random value used for determining the value, common numerical data can be used regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the amount of program by reducing the amount of processing in the random number update processing executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an alerting | reporting pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion production | presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the number of times of large winning a prize opening | release opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update of a total fluctuation frequency count value. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory increase display process. It is a figure which shows the operation example in a pending | holding memory | storage display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a specific production | presentation setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the last alerting | reporting buffer value. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect processing during jackpot control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an ending effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the hit fluctuation pattern determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a total fluctuation frequency update process. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, a decorative design or color design that is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified in a decorative design display area or a color design display area that is a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three. (Also referred to as “4th symbol”) is variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative design and the color design is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image indicating a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are arranged. When the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol (for example, update of the display color) is started in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The color symbols variably displayed in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as it is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display is based on the fact that the game ball has entered (starting winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. This occurs when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the One of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is changed to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not One of the displayed display parts is changed to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold indicator LED 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a predetermined solenoid for a normal electric accessory (normally A second start winning opening is provided. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball is unlikely to enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid is turned on, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the operation is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second special condition game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is changed from the second state which is disadvantageous to the player to the first state which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the 15-round jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a special gaming state such as a short-time state, or a gaming state other than the small hit gaming state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset). In the same manner as in the case where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is This is usually referred to as a big hit symbol (also referred to as a “non-probable big hit symbol”).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, or after the two round jackpot state is over based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, As one of the special game states different from the normal game state, for example, the special figure change time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability change state (high probability game state) in which probability change control (probability change control) is continuously performed is controlled. Is done. In this probability change state, the variable display result of each special figure game and the decorative symbol variable display is improved so that the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal state. Such a probability change state may be continued until the next variable display result is a “hit” regardless of the number of executions of the special game. On the other hand, after the certainty change state is reached, any one of the conditions that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is first. You may make it complete | finish when it is materialized. In addition, even if the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the probability change state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability change state ends at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. There may be. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot game state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol.

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” The second start condition is easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening, such as control for making the time longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L is based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. At 5C and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started, and, for example, the fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle” are stopped and displayed (derived display). Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, there may be included one that stops and displays a decorative symbol that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol simultaneously.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The decorative display variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such changes in the character image display, the background image display mode, and the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player by a variable display mode of the decorative pattern or the like is executed. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “pseudo-continuous”, “expansion chance item”, and “expansion opportunity item end” are set to be executable.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C are displayed. The effect display for changing the decorative design again at 5R (pseudo continuous change) can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stopped display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, in the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation variation display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the specific development of “Development Opportunities”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right”, and then all the decorative symbols are displayed. After 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the predetermined display effect is started with the variable display state of the decorative symbols as the reach state. The As an example, in the specific effect of “Development chance eyes”, the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “end of development opportunity”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then all decorative symbols are displayed. In the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, an effect display is performed in which a combination of decorative symbols predetermined as development opportunities is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “expansion opportunity” are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  Furthermore, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the specific effect, for example, by displaying the decorative pattern in a display mode other than the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may become a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, a notice effect such as “step-up image” is set to be executable.

  In the notice effect of “step-up image”, the image display device 5 is changed every time the decorative symbols change in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the display area, an effect display may be performed in which a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance are switched and displayed in a predetermined order. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without being switched.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. The fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 or the development chance item HC1 to HC8 in the special combination may be stopped and displayed. is there. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as the 15 round big hit symbol, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is used as the confirmed decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The variable display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this way, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined probability variation big hit combination and May be displayed in a stopped manner. Here, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” are “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect is The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is displayed without being executed is referred to as the variable display mode of “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “first positive change”, the game is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15th round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect different from the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variable” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “second positive change”, the control is made to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the variable change state is controlled to the positive change state. .

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the normal jackpot combination fixed decoration Symbols may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, the reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect. Is not executed, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is referred to as the “third probability change” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”. . Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. .

  As described above, when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed symbol design that is a probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed in the variable symbol variable display. Then, it is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the big hit state for 15 rounds. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “third probability variation”, the fixed decoration which is normally a big hit combination in the variable display of the decorative pattern is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable symbol display result of the decorative symbols. That is, the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, the confirmed decorative pattern that is normally a big hit combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, and a predetermined non- A fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination is stopped and displayed, or a fixed decorative pattern that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. In some cases, the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the random chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Note that the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be determined in advance as combinations of decorative symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the ornament is displayed in the same manner as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise”. After the variable display of the symbol is performed, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. There are cases where the display is stopped, or a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols on which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed decorative pattern that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3 (C) is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “accurate”, and the variable display mode is “small”. When it is “winning”, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In other words, when the fixed decorative symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “probable”. Determine. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues. If a decision is made to end the probability change state or the short-time state corresponding to the variable display game in which the variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is returned after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be controlled.

  When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, the decorative symbols that are normally the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. After that, for example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbols are changed again, and the decorative symbols that become the probable big hit combination are changed. Any of the decorative symbols that are normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the decoration symbol again, a promotion promotion failure during change is performed in which the fixed decoration symbol which is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display result when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds. After the control, the jackpot promotion effect is executed as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state during the period until the 15 round big hit state is finished. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette enters the “even number” in the big hit promotion promotion effect and displays the effect image of “Sorry!”, While the successful promotion to the big hit hits the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, the color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5 A corresponding to the variable symbol special symbol display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4 A. The variable display is performed, and the variable display of the symbol in the “right” color symbol display area 5B is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is called. Then, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, the fixed color symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. The As an example, when a special symbol indicating a number of “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “yellow” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. In addition, when any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7”, which are the 15-round jackpot symbols, is stopped and displayed as the special symbol for the special symbol game using the first special symbol, “Left In the color symbol display area 5A, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the determined color symbol. Furthermore, when a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, it is confirmed in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. A color design indicating “blue” as a color design is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, the “left” color symbol display area is displayed. In 5A, the color design indicating “green” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color design. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1” which becomes the two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol, and the special symbol game using the first special symbol When the special symbol indicating the number “5” that is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in “”, in the “left” color symbol display area 5A, for example, a color symbol indicating “yellow” or “green” May be stopped and displayed as a common fixed color design. If any of the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, In the color symbol display area 5B, the color symbol indicating “red” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed color symbol. When a special symbol indicating a “-” symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game using the second special symbol, the fixed color symbol is displayed in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. As a result, the color design indicating “blue” is stopped and displayed.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is mounted with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22 </ b> A and 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a pre-determined result indicating whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative display variable display mode in the case of “big hit” is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability” Data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “first probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “second probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “third probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a designation command for the 15th round big hit opening the big prize opening for designating the display of the effect image during the period in which the big prize winning opening is open in each round corresponding to the 15th round big hit state. Command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH corresponds to a two-round big hit state based on the variable display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “surprise”, and a small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for sudden / small hits that designates the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening is open in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state. This is a command that is designated after opening the big prize opening for small hits. For example, in the command for opening the big winning opening for the accuracy / small hit and the command specifying after opening the big winning opening, the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big hit state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH displays the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number so as to be specified in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) in the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special chart The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  The command D001H is a change count notification command for notifying the total change count that is the total value of the execution count of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the execution count of the pseudo continuous change performed during that time. Different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of fluctuations (for example, “0” to “3”).

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  On the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining the reach 2. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type and the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 20, for example, to update various numerical data by software, so that the random value MR1, Numerical data indicating a part of MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104 and indicates the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4. The numerical data may be updated by software using the random counter by the CPU 103. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit" or not. This is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the random display value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, “surprise probability” Is a random number value used to determine one of the big hit types as the plurality of types of specific variable display types, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “251”. Take.

  FIG. 6 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3 and non-reach PA1- 5, non-reach PA1-7, non-reach PB1-1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1, normal PA2-3, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1, super PB3- The fluctuation pattern of 3-3 super PB3-5, super PC3-1, and super PC3-3 is prepared.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA 2-5, normal PA 2-7, and super PA 4 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. -1, Super PA4-3 to Super PA4-5, Super PA4-7, Super PA4-8, Super PA5-1, Super PA5-3, Super PA5-4, Super PB4-1, Super PB4-3, Super PB4 -4, Super PB5-1, Super PB5-3, Super PB5-4, Super PC4-1 and Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1, Super PE1-1, Super PF1-1 and Super PF1-2, Special PG1 -1 to special PG1-4, special PG2-1 and special PG2-3, special PG3-1 and special PG -2 variation pattern are prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 8A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 8B. . The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine. The first special figure display result determination table 130 is a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 20 is off or on. Are set data (determination data) or the like associated with (assigned to) big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, or loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The second special figure display result determination table 130B determines whether to assign the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result to the big hit determination value data or the loss determination value data depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. Data.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes a jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. The jackpot type determination table 131 shows that when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” and “surprise probability”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 is “1” or “2”. Correspondingly, the random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is composed of decision data assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. Also, the jackpot type determination table 131 determines the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 (the jackpot type buffer value) based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type. It may include table data (setting data) for setting to any one of “00” to “04” corresponding to the big hit type.

  Here, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, for determining the big hit type for the big hit type of “surprise” depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. The assignment of the random value MR2-1 is different. That is, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the value in the range of “83” to “100” of the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to (F) and FIGS. 11 (A) to (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is, for example, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on the determination result of the jackpot type, it is selected as a use table. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprising probability”. The random number MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, and special CB4. -2, special CC 4-1, and special CC 4-2.

  Here, as an example, focusing on the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the big hit shown in FIG. 10A used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. The normal variation pattern type determination table 132A and the large variation pattern type determination table 132B for big hits shown in FIG. 10B used when the big hit type is “first probability variation” include normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is selected. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. In this way, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the allocation of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132H, 132I used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise”, such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot shown in FIG. 10 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the variation pattern type determination table 132E for jackpot shown in FIG. 10 (E) used when the gaming state is a probability change state, the change patterns of the normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 are used. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. Thus, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H and 132I (selected when “surprise probability”) are compared with each other, pachinko games Determine the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type according to whether the gaming state in the machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state. Are different random value assignment of MR3 of, also, may be assigned a random number value MR3 for determining variation pattern type for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 12D, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 12B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 12C, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132I for use. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 10 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 11 (B), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in C) is set so as to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “losing”. 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C includes a random number MR2-2 for determination of reach as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”, among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination, “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, while a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the determination result of the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR2-2 for reach determination. Are assigned to the non-reach HA1-2 decision result. Further, in response to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than “ A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3. The non-reach HA1 among the reach determination random numbers MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random values assigned to each of the determination results of −1 to non-reach HA 1-3, is used as the determination result of non-reach HA 1-4 or non-reach HA 1-5. assign. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is set to the reach state compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative design is determined to be the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is configured by data for determination assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2 to super CA2-4, and super CB2-1.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 14A, “1” to “1” among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. While the value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, the other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 to super CA2-4. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” among the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that the reach determination random number MR 2-2 corresponds to the case where the total pending storage number is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134 A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”. The determination result of the reach HA2-3 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. A random value MR2-2 is assigned. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed, compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is not set to the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 16, 17A, and 17B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate that when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type, the count value in the total fluctuation counter It is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern according to (total variation count value). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is used. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137C has a random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  In the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 16, the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1, and the normal PA2− corresponds to the case where the total variation count value is any one of “0” to “3”. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect such as 5 and normal PA2-7.

  In addition, in accordance with the variation pattern type of super CA 3-2 and the total variation count value is “0”, super PA 4-1, super PA 4-3, super PA 4-5, super PA 4-7, super Regardless of whether or not a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect such as PA4-8 is executed and the number of times of pseudo-continuous change execution, the random value MR4 for determining the change pattern is assigned to the change pattern for executing the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2. It has been. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-2 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, “Pseudo-Continuous” such as Super PA 4-1, Super PA 4-3, Super PA 4-5, Super PA 4-7. Without changing the specific effect of "" or after executing the specific effect of "pseudo-continuous" with the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation of 2 or less, the fluctuation pattern is changed to execute the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2. A random value MR4 for pattern determination is assigned. Further, in response to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA3-2 and the total variation count value is “2” or “3”, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” such as Super PA4-1 and Super PA4-5. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 and the reach effect α2.

  Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 is set and the total variation count value is “0”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as Super PB4-1, Super PB4-3, Super PB4-4 Regardless of the presence / absence of execution and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation, a random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1. Also, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as the super PB4-1 and the super PB4-3 are executed. Otherwise, after the execution of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect whose number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is 2 times or less, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1. . The reach effect β1 is executed without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in response to the case where the change pattern type is Super CA3-3 and the total change count value is “2” or “3”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PB4-1.

  In addition, in accordance with the variation pattern type of super CA 3-4 and the total variation count value is “0”, super PB4-1, super PB4-3, super PB4-4, super PC4-1, super Regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect such as PD1-1 is executed and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change, the random value MR4 for determining the change pattern is assigned to the change pattern for executing the reach effect β1. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, the “pseudo-continuous” such as the super PB4-1, super PB4-3, super PC4-1, and super PD1-1. ”Without performing the specific effect of“ ”, or after executing the“ pseudo-continuous ”specific effect of which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is two times or less, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 is used for determining the variation pattern. A random value MR4 is assigned. Further, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is set and the total variation count value is “2” or “3”, “pseudo” such as the super PB4-1, super PC4-1, and super PD1-1. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern in which the reach effect β1 is executed without executing the “ream” specific effect.

  Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA 3-5, and the total variation count value is “0”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as Super PA 5-1, Super PA 5-3, Super PA 5-4 Regardless of the presence or absence of execution and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation, a random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α3. In addition, in response to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA 3-5 and the total variation count value is “1”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as super PA 5-1 and super PA 5-3 are executed. Otherwise, after executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” having the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation of 2 or less, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α3. . The reach effect α3 is executed without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in response to the case where the change pattern type is Super CA3-5 and the total change count value is “2” or “3”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PA5-1.

  In addition, in response to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA 3-6 and the total variation count value is “0”, “super PB5-1, super PB5-3, super PB5-4, super PE1-1” The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach production β2, regardless of whether or not the specific representation of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed and the number of times of execution of the pseudo-continuous variation. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-6 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as Super PB5-1, Super PB5-3, Super PE1-1 are provided. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern in which the reach effect β2 is executed without executing or after executing a specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” having the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation of 2 or less. It has been. Further, in response to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA 3-6 and the total variation count value is “2” or “3”, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” such as super PB5-1 and super PE1-1. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β2 without executing the.

  Specifying the “Development Opportunities” such as Super PC 4-1 and Super PC 4-2 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA 3-7 and the total variation count value is any of “0” to “3”. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the effect.

  In addition, after executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is three, corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is super CA3-8 and the total variation count value is “0”. The random pattern MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern is added to the fluctuation pattern of the super PF1-1 that executes the reach effect β3 and the fluctuation pattern of the super PF1-2 that executes the reach effect of “normal” after passing through the roulette chance. Is assigned. Also, in response to the change pattern type of Super CA 3-8 and the total fluctuation count count value is any of “1” to “3”, the “normal” reach effect is executed after passing through the roulette chance. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PF1-2.

  Further, in the setting of the hit variation pattern determination table 137B shown in FIG. 17A, the variation pattern type of the super CB3-1 is set, and the super PB4-1 is corresponding to the case where the total variation count value is “0”. Regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as Super PB4-3 and Super PB4-4 are executed and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is used as the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 MR4 is assigned. Also, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-1 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as the super PB 4-1 and the super PB 4-3 are executed. Otherwise, after the execution of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect whose number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is 2 times or less, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1. . The reach effect β1 is executed without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in response to the change pattern type of the super CB 3-1 and the total change count value being “2” or “3”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PB4-1.

  Super PD1-1 that executes reach effect β1 after passing through the roulette chance, corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of super CB 3-2 is set and the total variation count value is any one of “0” to “3”. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern.

  Further, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-3 is set and the total variation count value is “0”, identification of “pseudo-continuous” such as the super PB5-1, the super PB5-3, and the super PB5-4. Regardless of whether or not the effect is executed and the number of times of pseudo-continuous change execution, the random value MR4 for determining the change pattern is assigned to the change pattern for executing the reach effect β2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-3 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, without performing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as the super PB5-1 and the super PB5-3, Alternatively, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern in which the reach production β2 is executed after the specific production of the “pseudo-continuous” having the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation of 2 or less. In addition, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-3 is set and the total variation count value is “2” or “3”, the reach production β2 is performed without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific production. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern of the super PB5-1 to be executed.

  Identification of “Development Opportunities” such as Super PC 4-1 and Super PC 4-2 corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of Super CB 3-4 is set and the total variation count value is any of “0” to “3”. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the effect. In addition, the super PE 1 that executes the reach effect β2 after passing through the roulette chance corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CB 3-5 is set and the total variation count value is any of “0” to “3”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern -1.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern depending on whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table, and the loss pattern is determined according to the determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2 to super CA2-4, and super CB2-1. The variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative pattern variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, when the decorative pattern variable display result is “loss” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 18 is a non-reach variation pattern type such as non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2, and the total variation count value is “0” to “2”. In response to any of the cases, the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5 that executes the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” with the number of times of execution of the pseudo-continuous change or the specific effect of “end of the development chance eyes” is performed. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 to be executed. In addition, in response to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2, and the total variation count value is “3”, a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye” is executed. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-7. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of non-reach CB1-2, among the random values MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the value in the range of “1” to “100” is “non-developed chance end” and the specific effect is executed. Assigned to the fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-7. With such a setting, in response to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “lost”, the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state, and the total variation count value, It is possible to determine whether one of the variation patterns of the reach PA 1-5 or the non-reach PA 1-7 and to perform an effect operation that becomes a specific effect.

  For the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1- of the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2. A value in the range of “231” to “241” is assigned corresponding to HA1-3, and a range of “237” to “241” corresponding to each of non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5. Value is assigned. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1”, and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “3”, “4”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total pending storage number corresponds to “5” to “8”, and “1” of the reach determination random number MR2-2. A value in the range of “230” is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4” or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2”. Compared with the case of "", the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special drawing variation time in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed is 16.70 seconds, and the specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 19, the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1 is set, and the normal PA2- is associated with the case where the total variation count value is any one of “0” to “2”. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern that executes a “normal” reach effect such as 1 and normal PA2-3.

  Also, whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as Super PA3-1 to SuperPA3-4 are executed in response to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA2-2 and the total variation count value is “0”. Regardless of the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, the presence / absence of execution of a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” such as Super PA3-5 to Super PA3-8, Regardless, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of Super CA 2-2 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-3. Alternatively, after executing a specific effect of “pseudo-run” having a number of executions of pseudo-run fluctuation of 2 times or less, a variation pattern for executing reach production α1 or “pseudo-run” such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-7. The random pattern value for determining the variation pattern is used as the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2 without executing the specific effect or after executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation of 2 or less. MR4 is assigned. Also, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 is set and the total variation count value is “2”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as the super PA 3-1 and the super PA 3-2 are executed. No, or a variation pattern in which the reach effect α1 is executed after executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” with the number of times of execution of the pseudo-run change, or “pseudo-run” such as super PA3-5 and super PA3-6. The random pattern value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used as the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach presentation α2 after executing the specific presentation of the “pseudo-continuous” without executing the specific presentation. MR4 is assigned. The reach effect α1 is executed without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect such as the super PA 3-1, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 is set and the total variation count value is “3”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern in which the reach effect α2 is executed without executing the variation pattern to be performed or the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect such as Super PA3-5.

  In addition, in accordance with the variation pattern type of super CA2-3 and the total variation count value is “0”, normal PA2-1, super PB3-1, super PB3-3, super PB3-5, super The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” specific production such as PC3-3 is executed and the number of times of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation execution. Corresponding to the variation pattern type of Super CA2-3 and the total variation count value being “1”, normal PA2-1, super PB3-1, super PB3-3, super PB3-5, super PC3- The change pattern in which the reach effect β1 is executed without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect such as 3 or after executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect whose number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change is 2 times or less. A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. In addition, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 is set, and the normal PA2-1, super PB3-1, super PB3-5, super PC3 corresponding to the case where the total variation count value is “2” or “3”. The change pattern for executing the reach effect β1 without executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” such as −3 or after executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” with one execution number of the pseudo-continuous change, A random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned.

  Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA2-4 is set and the total variation count value is “0”, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as the super PB3-1, the super PB3-3, and the super PB3-5 Regardless of the presence / absence of execution and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation, a random number value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1. In addition, in response to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 is set and the total variation count value is “1”, identification of “pseudo-continuous” such as the super PB3-1, super PB3-3, and super PB3-5. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern is used as the variation pattern for executing the reach production β1 without executing the effect or after executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” having the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation of 2 times or less. Is assigned. In accordance with the variation pattern type of Super CA2-3 and the total variation count value being “2” or “3”, “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as Super PB3-1 and Super PB3-5 are executed. Without executing or after executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” with one execution of pseudo-continuous variation, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1. Yes.

  Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CB 2-1 is set and the total variation count value is any one of “0” to “3”, the variation patterns such as the super PC 3-1 and the super PC 3-3 that pass through the roulette chance. Further, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned.

  In addition, a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as a variation pattern of Super PA 3-2 to Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-6 to Super PA 3-8, Super PB3-3, and Super PB3-4. As for the variation pattern, the variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the pseudo continuous variation. That is, since the variation pattern of super PA 3-2 to super PA 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing reach effect α1, the variation pattern type of super CA 2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Corresponding to this, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of Super PA 3-6 to Super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, it corresponds to the case of the variation pattern type of Super CA2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation patterns of the super PB3-3 and the super PB3-4 are variation patterns for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern types of the super CA2-3 and the super CA2-4 are used in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. Corresponding to the case, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1 and super CA2-2 to super CA2-4, any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned. In addition, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1 in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the effect in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols has reached the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. Further, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of the “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type.

  In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are set as the hold data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) Remember.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of the game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are set as the hold data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which game ball has won in either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, so that the order of winning of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151C stores “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening or “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second starting winning opening. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, a counter initialization flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 39 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 40, which process should be selected and executed is instructed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in step S16 of FIG. 39 or the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 48 executed to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability change flag is set to an on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to a probability change state, while being cleared to an off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. . The counter initialization flag is used to instruct whether or not to initialize the total variation number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and is determined to be a variation pattern for stopping and displaying the fixed decorative symbols other than the non-reach combinations. When the total number of reserved storage is “0”, or when the total fluctuation count counter value reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the ON state is set.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal map change timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time which is the execution time of the normal game. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, a total variation counter, and the like. Yes.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, and MR4 is stored as random count values, which are periodically updated according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total pending memory count is stored in the total pending memory count counter as the total pending memory count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in response to an increase or decrease in the total pending memory count )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state. The total variation counter is for counting the total number of variations, which is the sum of the number of executions of variable display of decorative symbols and the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation performed during that time. For example, when the counter initialization flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, data indicating the count initial value “0” is set as the total variation count counter value in the total variation count counter. . Then, when the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is not executed is executed, the total variation count value is incremented by one and updated. In addition, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed after the execution of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect with the execution count of the pseudo-continuous change of 1, the total change count count value is incremented by 2 and updated. Further, when the decorative symbol variable display is executed after the execution of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect of which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous change is two, the total change count count value is incremented by three and updated. Then, when the decorative symbol variable display is executed after the execution of the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” with the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous change of three, the total change count count value is incremented by 4 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area in which setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and may be configured so that a plurality of buffer areas can be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  In the jackpot type buffer, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, and “surprise probability”. The buffer value corresponding to the determination result of which to be determined is stored. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 9, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the value of the jackpot type buffer (hit type buffer value) is set to “00”. When the type is “first probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “01”, and when the big hit type is “second probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “02” and the big hit type is In the case of “third probability variation”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “03”, and in the case of the big hit type “surprise”, the big hit type buffer value is set to “04”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination Random number value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the development opportunity, random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, and disorder for determining the promotion effect execution Numerical data indicating the numerical value SR5 and the random number value SR6 for determining the notification pattern are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the effect. The random number circuit 124 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6. The effect control CPU 120 uses various random counters different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6 may be counted. Further, when the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-. 3, numerical data indicating all of SR5, SR6 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ A value in the range of “70” is taken, and the random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for designating the temporary stop symbol at the time of development chance is used to display the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when executing the specific effect of “Development Chance”. Is a random number value used to determine a decorative pattern to be displayed in a temporary stop state in whole or in part, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used to determine a combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is the promotion effect during change when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The random number SR6 for determining the notification pattern determines one of a plurality of types of notification patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation for notifying the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation when executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random value used for this purpose and takes a value in the range of “1” to “150”.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E is used as a table for determining a predetermined decorative pattern that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160E are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22 (A) is a final left symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the predetermined decorative symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22B is a final right symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C is a final final symbol that is a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a left / right turn determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C has a third random number SR1- 3 is made up of determination data and the like assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols that become the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22 (B), the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is the same as the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. Further, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A, the part that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3 (C), random numbers SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol are provided in the portions that are the chances of random chance TC1 to TC4, and in the portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance item HC1 to HC8, or a random chance symbol TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22 (D) shows the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C when a specific effect of “end of development chance” is executed. 5R, the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6, which are final decorative symbols, are determined based on the random numbers SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbols. It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160E shown in FIG. 22 (E) has the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, Based on the random value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, the combination of the final decorative symbols that become the final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, FZ1-6 at 5R It is a table that is referred to to determine either. The final stop symbol determination table 160E is composed of determination data that assigns the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, as tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 25 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the finalized symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a decorative symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 25 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -3 is a table that is referred to to determine -3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ When the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order, such as “medium”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. The left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, and then the final stop symbol determination table 162B is The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a final decorative symbol that is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. When the final stop symbol determination table 162B is one of the fluctuation patterns of normal PA2-1 and special PG2-1, or when it is normal PA2-3, super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and super PB3-1. , Super PB3-3, Super PB3-4, Super PB3-5, Super PC3-1, Super PC3-3, Special PG2-3, if it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-5 to Super PA3-8 For determining whether to assign the random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol to the symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, “+2” depending on one of the variation patterns It consists of data.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C is used as a table for determining a final decorative symbol that is one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163C are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 26 (A) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the fixed ornament symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “of the normal symbol that is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 26 (B) is stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are displayed based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 26 (C) includes the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4 in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. -2 and FZ4-3 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined decorative symbols as one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. is there. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a notification pattern determination table 164 illustrated in FIG. 27 as a table for determining one of a plurality of notification patterns. The notification pattern determination table 164 shown in FIG. 27 indicates notification patterns for notification HP1-1 to notification HP1-3 and notification HP1-3 based on a random number SR6 for notification pattern determination when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Table referenced to determine one of HP2-1 to Notification HP2-3, Notification HP2-1 to Notification HP2-3, Notification HP3-1 to Notification HP3-3, Notification HP4-1 to Notification HP4-3 It is. The notification pattern determination table 164 determines the notification pattern according to the variation pattern or, for example, whether the previous notification buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 164 shown in FIG. 38 is “0” to “3”. The random number SR6 for use is composed of data for determination assigned to the notification patterns of notification HP1-1 to notification HP1-3.

  Here, in the notification patterns of the notification HP1-1, the notification HP2-1, the notification HP3-1, and the notification HP4-1, all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. When the variation of the decorative pattern is started, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified by the sound and sound effect output modes from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the notification patterns of the notification HP 1-2, the notification HP 2-2, the notification HP 3-2, and the notification HP 4-2, the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all decorated. When the symbol variation is started, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified by lighting / extinguishing / flashing modes of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. In the notification patterns of the notification HP1-3, the notification HP2-3, the notification HP3-3, and the notification HP4-3, the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all decorated. When the symbol variation is started, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is determined by the output mode of the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting / extinguishing / flashing mode of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. Informed.

  Then, when the previous notification buffer value is “0”, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variable display result of “losing” among the variation patterns for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. In the case of the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case, the values in the range of “1” to “70” of the random number SR6 for determining the notification pattern are the notification HP1-1, the notification HP2-1, and the notification HP3-1. , Assigned to one of the notification patterns of the notification HP 4-1, and the value in the range of “71” to “130” is any one of the notification HP 1-2, the notification HP 2-2, the notification HP 3-2, and the notification HP 4-2. And a value in a range of “131” to “150” is a notification pattern of any one of notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3, and notification HP4-3. Assigned to. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” among the variation patterns that execute the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the notification pattern is determined. Among the random numbers SR6 for use, a value in the range of “1” to “20” is assigned to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-1, notification HP2-1, notification HP3-1, and notification HP4-1. A value in the range of “21” to “50” is assigned to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-2, notification HP2-2, notification HP3-2, and notification HP4-2, and “51” to “150”. The value of the range is assigned to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3, and notification HP4-3.

  With this setting, when the variable display result is “losing”, the notification HP 1-1, notification HP 1-2, notification HP 2-1 and notification HP 2-2 are compared to when the variable ideographic result is “big hit”. , Notification HP3-1, notification HP3-1, notification HP4-1, notification HP4-2, and the rate at which any one of the notification patterns is determined increases, notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3. The rate at which one of the notification patterns of the notification HP 4-3 is determined is low. For this reason, in response to any of the notification patterns of notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3, and notification HP4-3, the output mode of the sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect When the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified by the lighting / extinguishing / flashing mode of the lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the notification HP1-1, the notification HP2-1, the notification HP3-1, and the notification HP4-1. Corresponding to one of the notification patterns, when the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation is notified by the output mode of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L, 8R, notification HP1-2, notification HP2-2, notification Corresponding to the notification pattern of either HP3-2 or notification HP4-2, compared to the case where the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified by the lighting / extinction / flashing mode of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. ,Degree of reliability Possibility that the variable display result is "big hit") increases.

  When the previous notification buffer value is “1”, a notification pattern determination random value SR6 is assigned only to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-1, notification HP2-1, and notification HP3-1, When the previous notification buffer value is “2”, only the notification pattern of notification HP1-2, notification HP2-2, or notification HP3-2 is assigned a random number SR6 for determining the notification pattern, and the previous notification is notified. When the buffer value is “3”, the random value SR6 for determining the notification pattern is assigned only to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, and notification HP3-3. With such an assignment, when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified in the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”, the same notification pattern as the previously determined notification pattern can be determined. .

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 28A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 28A, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A, the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is changing depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result with the variable promotion effect, and the promotion promotion during the variable is failed. The production will be executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, a part of the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect, and the rest is determined without the changing promotion effect. Assigned to the result. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion success during the change and the change promotion during the change Any failure production will not be executed.

  In the jackpot promotion promotion execution execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 28B, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, it is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 as a jackpot. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion success production or a big hit promotion promotion production. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result with the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability change” or “second probability change”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the jackpot promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion Neither the successful performance nor the promotion failure during jackpot will be executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Assigned to the decision result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 29A to 29D are used as tables for determining decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-2 to super PA3-4, super PA3— 6 to Super PA3-8, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-7, Super PA4-8, Super PA5-3, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-3, Super PB3-4, Super PB4- 3, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-3, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-2, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. Here, for example, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the decorative symbol (pseudo continuous variation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Becomes “1” when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” when the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed twice before (“pseudo continuous variation”). By the time the pseudo continuous variation in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and executed is executed, the variation of the decorative symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shows the total re-variation display operation executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the temporary temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the temporary symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the right symbol to be stopped and selected as a use table for determining the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C Is done. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-2 to Super PA3-4, Super PA3-6 to Super PA3-8, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-7, Super PA4-8. , Super PA5-3, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-3, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-3, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-3, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-2 When the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which becomes the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol display error “right” To determine the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed at 5R, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Is used as the usage table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-4, Super PA3-7, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-7, Super PA4. -8, Super PA5-3, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-3, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-3, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-3, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1 -2 or special PG1-3, the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” The left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the “right” decorative symbol The right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the display area 5R, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, are determined. Is selected as a usage table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4. The remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of Super PF1-1 or Special PG1-3 is “3”. The left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R; The right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, the use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. It is selected.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 29A and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 29B are respectively a left final stop symbol as a final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2 according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of 3 is determined data assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by the combination of -3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 29C is determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and the middle temporary stop symbol 2-3. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 29D includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, a right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 30, non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-2 to super PA3-4, super PA3− 6 to Super PA3-8, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-7, Super PA4-8, Super PA5-3, Super PA5-4, Super PB3-3, Super PB3-4, Super PB4- 3. Super PB4-4, Super PB5-3, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-2, Special PG1-3 Decorative drawing for temporary stop display in all of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R And it can be determined in any of the pseudo-communication opportunity eyes GC1～GC8.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM 121, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 has a chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols which become the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for time is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. ing.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 32 as a table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left center right that is stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the final symbol combination that is a jackpot combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3, It consists of decision data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a notification pattern determination table 171 shown in FIG. 33 as a table for determining any of a plurality of types of notification patterns. The notice pattern determination table 171 has no notice based on the fluctuation pattern and the total number of changes, or the notice patterns are notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-3, notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-3, notice YP3-1, notice It is a table referred to in order to determine either YP3-2 or notice YP4-1. The notice pattern determination table 171 has no notice or notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-3, notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-3, notice YP3-1, notice YP3- according to the variation pattern and the total number of changes. 2. It consists of data for determination assigned to the notice pattern of notice YP4-1.

  Here, the notice patterns of the notice YP1-1 to the notice YP1-3, the notice YP2-1 to the notice YP2-3, the notice YP3-1, the notice YP3-2, and the notice YP4-1 are displayed in different effect display modes. The effect display in the notice effect of “step-up image” is performed. In the notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, notice YP1-1 to notice YP1-3, notice YP2-1. ~ In accordance with the respective notice patterns of notice YP2-3, notice YP3-1, notice YP3-2, notice YP4-1, a plurality of kinds of effect images are switched in accordance with a predetermined order, or Switching may not occur.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 34, a notification effect control pattern table 183 shown in FIG. 35, a notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 36, and various effects shown in FIG. A control pattern table 182 and the like are included. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 34, the ornamental symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 in the period from when the variation of the ornamental symbols is started until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, and the effect display operation in the specific effect as the symbol variation control pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes various effects according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  In the notification effect control pattern table 183 shown in FIG. 35, data indicating the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notification effect, such as the effect display operation in the notification effect, is notified in correspondence with each of the plurality of types of notification patterns. A plurality of types of effect control patterns may be stored. Each notification effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations according to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 183 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP1-1-1 to the notice CYP1-1-3 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice HP1-1. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1 and the total number of fluctuations “2”, and “do” from the speakers 8L and 8R at the start of the first fluctuation. Output the sound. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1-2 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1 and the total number of changes “3”, and at the start of the first change, the sound “R” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Output. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1-3 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1 and the total number of fluctuations “4”, and “mi” sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the start of the first fluctuation. Output.

  The notification effect control pattern table 183 stores the notification effect control patterns of the notifications CYP1-2-1 to CYP1-2-3 corresponding to the notification patterns of the notification HP1-2. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 and the total number of changes “2”. Turn on only one. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2-2 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 and the total number of changes “3”. Two of the game effect lamps 9 are turned on. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2-3 turns on all three game effect lamps 9 at the start of the first fluctuation corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 and the total number of changes “4”.

  Further, the notice effect control pattern table 183 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP1-3-1 to notice CYP1-3-3 corresponding to the notice pattern of notice HP1-3. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 and the total number of fluctuations “2”, and “do” from the speakers 8L and 8R at the start of the first fluctuation. Is output, and only one of the three game effect lamps 9 is turned on. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3-2 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3 and the total number of fluctuations “3”. At the same time, two of the three game effect lamps 9 are turned on. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3-3 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3 and the total number of changes “4”, and the sound of “DO” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the start of the first change. While outputting, all three game effect lamps 9 are turned on.

  In the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 36, data indicating the control content of the effect operation corresponding to the notice effect, such as an effect display operation in the notice effect, corresponding to each of a plurality of types of notice patterns, is provided. A plurality of types of effect control patterns may be stored. Each notice effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations corresponding to variable display of decorative symbols such as effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series.

  As an example, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notices CYP1-1 to CYP1-3 corresponding to the notice patterns of the notices YP1-1 to YP1-3. . Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-1, and the effect image of the first step is displayed at the start of the first variation (at the start of variable display of decorative symbols). Display. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 displays the effect image of the second step at the start of the first change (at the start of variable display of decorative symbols) corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-3 displays the effect image of the third step at the start of the first change (at the start of variable display of decorative symbols) corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3.

  Also, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores notice effect control patterns of notice CYP2-1 to notice CYP2-3 corresponding to each of the notice patterns of notice YP2-1 to notice YP2-3. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and the first step effect image at the start of the second change (at the start of the first pseudo continuous change). Is displayed. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-2 displays the effect image of the first step at the start of the first variation (at the start of variable display of decorative symbols) corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2. After that, at the start of the second change (at the start of the first pseudo continuous change), the effect image is switched to the effect image of the second step. The notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-3 displays the effect image of the second step at the start of the first fluctuation (at the start of variable display of decorative symbols) corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP2-3. After that, at the start of the second fluctuation (at the start of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation), the effect image is switched to the effect image of the third step.

  Further, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control patterns of the notice CYP3-1 and the notice CYP3-2 corresponding to the notice patterns of the notice YP3-1 and the notice YP3-2, respectively. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1, and the first step effect image at the start of the second fluctuation (at the start of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation). Is displayed, the effect image is switched to the effect image of the second step at the start of the third variation (at the start of the second pseudo continuous variation). Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2, and the effect image of the first step is displayed at the time of the first fluctuation start (at the start of variable display of decorative symbols). After the display, the effect image is switched to the effect image of the second step at the start of the second fluctuation (at the start of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation), and then at the third change start (the second pseudo continuous change). At the start of fluctuation), the effect image is switched to the effect image of the third step.

  In addition, the notice effect control pattern table 181 stores the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP4-1 corresponding to the notice pattern of the notice YP4-1. Here, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP4-1 corresponds to the notice pattern of the notice YP4-1, and the first step effect image at the start of the second change (at the start of the first pseudo continuous change). Is displayed, the effect image is switched to the effect image of the second step at the start of the third variation (at the start of the second pseudo continuous variation), and then the fourth variation is started (the third simulation is started). At the start of continuous fluctuation), the effect image is switched to the effect image of the third step.

  In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 37, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. The contents of various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 38, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 38 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate sound and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is generated from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from each switch 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least part of random number values MR1, MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4, etc. used on the main board 11 side by software is executed. (Step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 39 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may identify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S204). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 39 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S206, for example, by adding 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the total reserved memory number is set to 1. Add (step S207). Then, “first” start data corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S208). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S209). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 39 after the special symbol process process ends. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the process of step S209 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. Is determined (step S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the on state (step S210; Yes), it corresponds to the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S211). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (second reserved memory number count value).

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S211 (step S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step) S213). Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 39 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Then, “second” start data corresponding to winning in the second start winning opening is stored at the head of the empty entry in the start data storage unit 151C (step S217). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S218). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 39 after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 40 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol, etc. is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. A decision is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process is based on the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination result of whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach state, etc. Thus, a process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the special figure variation time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag is set. The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, an upper limit of a period during which the big prize opening is in an open state may be set corresponding to the setting of the maximum number of big prize opening times. As an example, when the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15 round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. On the other hand, if the maximum value for the number of times a big winning opening is opened is set to “2” corresponding to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. Set to.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to a predetermined solenoid should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time elapses and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of the variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the maximum value of the number of times that the big prize opening is opened is “0” because the variable display result is “small hit”, and the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened is set to “0. “5 seconds” may be set.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to a predetermined solenoid may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 42, the CPU 103 first sums the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number based on the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number as a value is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total reserved storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). At this time, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory number count value, the total reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C receives the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “first” (step S234; first), the first special figure hold storage unit 151A stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S235). At this time, for example, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the first reserved memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S236). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the special fluctuation designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the fluctuation special figure) The designated buffer value) is set to “1” (step S237).

  After the process of step S237 is executed, a first table shown in FIG. 8A is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. The figure display result determination table 130A is selected and set (step S238). For example, in the process of step S238, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The CPU 103 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S235 is the big hit determination value data. (Step S239).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S239 (step S239; No), the numerical value indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S235. It is determined whether or not the data matches the small hit determination value data (step S240). At this time, if it matches with the small hit determination value data (step S240; Yes), the small hit flag is set to the on state (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “second” (step S234; second), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold data in association with the hold number “1”. As the hold data, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S242). At this time, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, the second reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B uses the reserved number “1” The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S243). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S244).

  After the process of step S244 is executed, a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8B is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”. 130B is selected and set (step S245). For example, in the process of step S245, the storage address of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like. The CPU 103 refers to the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S242 is the jackpot determination value data. (Step S246).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S239 or step S246 (step S239; Yes, or step S246; Yes), the jackpot provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 The flag is set to an on state (step S247). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S248). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type read in step S235 or step S242, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S248. It is determined as one of a plurality of types of “normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, and “outward probability” (step S249). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S244, a random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type with respect to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determining table 131 is set. Is not assigned, the jackpot type will not be determined as “surprising”. Corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S249, the big hit type buffer value is set to any one of “00” to “04” (step S250).

  After executing one of the processes of step S241 and step S250, the maximum winning opening opening number is set (step S251). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, if the big hit type is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the maximum value of the number of times of winning the prize winning opening corresponds to the game that is opened 15 times. Set to “15”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” or the small hit type is “small hit”, the maximum value of the number of big winning opening is set to “2” corresponding to the two-time open game. To do.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data at step S240 (step S240; No), or when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data at step S246 ( Step S246; No) Or, after executing the process of step S251, a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the result of determining the variable display result or determining the jackpot type (step S252). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S240, or if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S246, it is variable. Corresponding to the determination result that the display result is “lost”, the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” that becomes the lost symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S240, the small hit symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S239 or step S246, “1”, “3”, which become the big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S249. ”Or“ 7 ”, one of the special symbols indicating the number is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S252, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S253), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S254), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. 11 (D) is based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. According to the setting, any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the table shown in FIG. In accordance with the selection setting, any one of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S264).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S263 (step S263; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 5, any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state (step S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Based on the reach determination random number MR2-2 extracted in step S267, the presence / absence of the reach state is determined by referring to any of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S265 (step S265). S268).

  If a determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state such as the determination result of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S268. As the use table, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set (step S270). On the other hand, when a determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1- in step S268. 1, as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result without reach state such as the determination result of non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 Then, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set (step S271).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. Either one is determined (step S273).

  Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol on the basis that the first starting condition is satisfied. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S268, it is changed by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the change pattern type. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is thus determined in step S273, the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C are used as use tables for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. And one of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B are selected and set (step S274). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S274 (step S276). .

  Here, in the processes of steps S275 and S276, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is determined by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, for example, the value of the total variation counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (total variation count value) is updated (step S281). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 45A, the variation patterns determined in step S276 are non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-7, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach. PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2, normal PA2-1, normal PA2-3, super PA3-1, super PA3-5, super PA4-1, super PA4-5, super PA5-1 , Super PB3-1, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-1, Super PB5-1, Super PC3-1, Super PC3-3, Super PC4-1, Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1, Super PE1-1 , Super PF1-2, Special PG1-1, Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1, Special PG2-3, Special PG3- , If any of the special PG3-2 the total variation time count count value is updated by adding 1. If the variation pattern determined in step S276 is any one of non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, and special PG1-2, the total variation count value is incremented by 2. Updated. Further, the variation pattern determined in step S276 is super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, super PB5- 3 or special PG1-3, the total variation count value is incremented by 3 and updated. Then, the variation patterns determined in step S276 are super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5- 4 or super PF1-1, the total variation count value is incremented by 4 and updated.

  After executing the process of step S281, for example, a counter initialization flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set (step S282). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 45B, the variation patterns determined in step S276 are non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach. When it is other than PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2, or when the total number of reserved storage is “0”, or the total variation count value updated in step S281 is “4”. ", The counter initialization flag is set to the on state, otherwise it is cleared to the off state.

  After the process of step S282 is executed, a special figure fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determination result of step S276 (step S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S278 is executed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a variation count to the effect control substrate 12 from the main substrate 11. In order to transmit the notification commands sequentially, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is transmitted in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a variation count to the effect control substrate 12 from the main substrate 11. In order to transmit the notification commands sequentially, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S279 is performed, every time the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 39 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation count notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S279, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S280), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not, for example, a counter initialization flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (step S289). At this time, if the counter initialization flag is ON (step S289; Yes), the total variation count value provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is updated to “0” (step S290).

  When it is determined in step S289 that the counter initialization flag is off (step S289), or after the processing of step S290 is executed, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time-short flag to turn it off, a process of clearing a special-figure variation counter for counting the number of times that the special-figure game is executed in the probability change state or the time-short state, etc. It only has to be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S297; No), a small hit start time production waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S298, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S302). . After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). For example, in the process of step S303, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the updated special figure fluctuation number count value is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the special game state end determination value is met. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability change state or the time reduction state may be ended by controlling the normal state after the probability change state or the time reduction state, for example, by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability change flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. After executing the end determination of the probability variation state or the short time state, the special symbol stop process ends. Note that the end determination based on the special figure variation count value may be performed only in the short-time state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. . Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like Then, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot ending presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening of the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S312 is “00” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S313). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “00” (step S313; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S314). As an example, in the process of step S314, the time reduction flag is set to the on state, and the count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. May be set in the special figure fluctuation counter.

  When the big hit type buffer value is other than “00” in step S313 (step S313; No), setting for starting control to the probability variation state is performed (step S315). As an example, in the process of step S315, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the probability variation state is set as the number of special diagram fluctuations. It only has to be set in the counter.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S314 and S315, the special figure process flag value is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S316), and then the big hit end process is terminated. To do.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). Determine whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a numerical value indicating a random number value for determining a normal display result from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, depending on the value of the usual process flag, the following is performed. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure hold storage unit, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result as the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol game in the general symbol game is set to “per normal symbol” or “ A decision is made as to whether or not it is a “usual figure loss”. At this time, for example, when one of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag is on, the determination is set so that the ratio of “decision per normal” is higher than when both are off. You may refer to the table. As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game is more likely to be “per ordinary figure” than in the normal state, so that the second start winning prize formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is formed. The mouth is likely to be in an expanded open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the normal variation pattern may be determined such that the normal variation time is shorter than when both are off. This reduces the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game in the probability variation state and the short time state. The second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening.

  The normal symbol variation process of step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on such settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result, which is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol, when the normal symbol stop process of step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, a determination is made as to whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time determined in accordance with the normal time fluctuation pattern. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the normal symbol process flag value when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, for driving the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example. The value of the general process flag is updated to “4” after the setting for the enlargement / release control in which the movable blade piece is tilted, such as the setting of the normal operation pattern. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, a normal operation pattern in which the period and the number of times of performing the expansion opening control are increased as compared with the case where both are off may be set. . As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the period and the number of times that the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state are increased based on the fact that the base map display result is “per base map”, and the game ball is in the second state. It becomes easier to enter the starting prize opening. If the normal map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process in step S144 is executed when the value of the usual process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stop process in step S143. You can make it. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is driven and the second start winning opening is set to the open expanded state is measured, and the elapsed time is enlarged corresponding to the ordinary electric actuating pattern. A determination is made whether the opening time has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the expansion opening period, the driving of the ordinary electric utility solenoid is stopped, and the movable wing piece is returned from the tilting position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening is in the expansion opening state. Set to change from normal to open state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 49 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 195. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  In the command analysis process of step S405, for example, a pending storage increase display process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50 is executed. In the reserved memory increase display process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is reception (step S151). At this time, if no pending storage number notification command is received (step S151; No), the pending storage increase display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the pending storage number notification command has been received (step S151; Yes), one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command is selected. It is determined whether the designated command has been received (step S152). Here, it is determined whether or not the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command has been received in the command analysis processing in step S405, and any of the start opening prize designation commands is received. When it is determined that there is a command, a command reception flag corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command may be set to an on state. As an example, when the first start opening prize designation command is received, the first start opening prize designation command reception flag is set to ON, while when the second start opening prize designation command is received, the second start opening prize designation command is set. Sets the specified command reception flag to the on state. In step S152, if either the first start opening prize designation command reception flag or the second start opening prize designation command reception flag is on, it may be determined that the start opening prize designation command has been received.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), for example, depending on whether or not the first starting opening winning designation command receiving flag is ON, etc. It is determined whether or not the received start opening winning designation command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step S153). At this time, if it is determined that the command is the first start opening winning designation command (step S153; Yes), the reserved storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is updated corresponding to the increase in the first reserved storage number. Therefore, the first hold display increase update setting is performed (step S154). In this first hold display increase update setting, for example, the first start by the game ball having entered one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H into the first start winning opening. Display setting for changing to blue display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such first hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  When it is determined in step S153 that the command is the second start opening prize designation command (step S153; No), the reserved memory display in the start prize memory display area 5H corresponding to the increase in the second reserved memory number. 2nd hold display increase update setting for updating is performed (step S155). In the second hold display increase / update setting, for example, one of the display parts that are not displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H is used for the second start due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening. Display setting for changing to red display is performed according to the establishment of the condition. After performing such second hold display increase update setting, the hold storage increase display process ends.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is displayed correspondingly when there is no start opening prize designation. Display update setting is performed when no start opening winning designation is specified for updating (step S156). In this display update setting when the start opening prize is not specified, for example, a display setting for changing all of the display parts that are displayed in blue or red in the start prize storage display area 5H to gray display, and a start prize storage display. Display setting for changing one of the display parts that are not displayed in the area 5H to gray display is performed. After performing such a display update setting when no start opening prize designation is made, the on-hold storage increase display process is terminated.

  As described above, when the first hold display increase update setting is performed in step S154 and the second hold display increase update setting is performed in step S155, the hold memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. If either of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command as the starting opening winning designation command is normally received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the display area 5H, a first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A based on establishment of the first start condition and a second special figure reservation based on establishment of the second start condition The second reserved memory number, which is the number of stored pending data in the storage unit 151B, can be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  On the other hand, in step S156, when the start opening prize designation is not specified, the display update setting is performed, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the first starting opening prize that becomes the start opening prize designation command is received. Based on the determination that neither the designation command nor the second start opening prize designation command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, By displaying in gray as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be displayed so that they cannot be specified. After that, when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, if the start opening winning designation command is normally received, one of the processes of steps S154 and S155 is executed. It is possible to add a new display corresponding to the received start opening winning designation command while maintaining the display mode in the gray display area. As an example, when the hold memory display as shown in FIG. 51 (B) is performed, if the hold memory number notification command is received after the first start opening winning designation command is normally received, By performing the first hold display increase update setting in S154, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), a blue display corresponding to winning in the first start winning opening is added.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166, for example, according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variation start command reception waiting process, the image display device 5 is changed depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. Variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area, and “left” and “right” colored symbol display areas 5A. 5B includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of the color symbol in any one of 5B. At this time, if it is determined that variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to, in order to perform various production operations including variable display of decorative design and color design, final decorative design that becomes the final stop design according to the variation pattern and variable display results, temporary stop design, specific production The process includes determining a pattern, a notice pattern, and the like, and setting a design variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and the like based on the determination result. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation process, various controls are performed from the symbol variation control pattern and the preview effect control pattern in accordance with the value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 (effect control process timer value). Processing for reading out data and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “small hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound effect sound signal is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as turning off / off / flashing. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying sound in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and playing the game effect lamp 9 and decorations by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. As an example, in the effect process during small hit control in step S165, the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-2 and the hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. Reading from the various effect control pattern table 182 and setting the effect control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such setting may be an effect operation that is common to both surprise and small hits that may be executed even when the big hit type is “Accuracy”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs are turned on / off by output of electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14. This includes processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as blinking / flashing. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation.

  53 and 54 are flowcharts showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (FIG. 53). Step S501). In the process of step S501, it may be determined whether or not the variable display result is “lost” by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command. At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 6). It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined decorative symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 22D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1- 5, The combination of FZ1-6 is determined as a definitive decorative symbol.

  If it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is not a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity” (step S503; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the pending storage number notification command, It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number, which is the total value of the one reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, is “0” (step S521). At this time, if the total number of reserved memories is other than “0” (step S521; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the change count notification command, the number of executions of the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed between them. It is determined whether or not the total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of executions of the pseudo continuous fluctuations, is “4” (step S522). At this time, if the total number of fluctuations is other than “4” (step S522; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting any of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is determined (step S523). ). As an example, in the process of step S523, the final stop symbol determination table 160E shown in FIG. 22E is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160E based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ1-4, FZ1 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The combination of −5 and FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  If it is determined in step S521 that the total number of reserved memories is “0” (step S521; Yes), or if it is determined in step S522 that the total number of fluctuations is “4” (step S522). ; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Therefore, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols does not become a reach combination or a jackpot combination, and even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 25A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 25B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. Then, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is It is determined whether it is one of the “surprise” or other than that (step S507). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, the change pattern designation command By reading the EXT data or the like, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 7, all the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is “non-reach”. Therefore, if it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S503 shown in FIG. 53, and step S504 is performed. The final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is determined by one of the processes of S505. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4, it is designated by the variation pattern designation command in the process of step S503 shown in FIG. If the variation pattern is the variation pattern of the special PG1-4 (see FIG. 7), it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”.

  If it is determined in step S508 in FIG. 54 that the fluctuation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 fluctuation pattern (step S508; No), the designated fluctuation pattern is the special PG2-1 to special PG2-. It is determined whether it is any of the three fluctuation patterns or any other pattern (step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 7, each of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 designates that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. ing. Therefore, when it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506 shown in FIG. The final decorative symbol that constitutes the final stop symbol is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 in FIG. 54 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; No), the designated variation pattern is special PG3-1 to special PG3-. One of the three variation patterns. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3, the combination of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result of the decorative pattern is selected from any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any one of the special PG3-1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns, the combination of the finalized decorative symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 26C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S507; No), among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “ It is determined whether any one of “normal big hit” and “third probability variation” or any other one (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit”, or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S511; Yes), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Is determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 26A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; No), the big hit type corresponds to either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation big hit combination is determined (step S513). As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 26B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After performing any of the processes in steps S504, S522, S505, and S506 in FIG. 53, or after performing any of the processes in steps S510, S512, and S513 in FIG. 54, the specific effect setting process is performed. (Step S514). FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification waiting flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S546). Here, the notification waiting flag specifies that the total number of fluctuations is to be notified at the next variable symbol display start, and is set to the ON state by executing the processing of step S550 described later. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off by executing the process of step S547 described later. At this time, when the notification waiting flag is on (step S546; Yes), the notification waiting flag is cleared and turned off (step S547).

  If it is determined in step S546 that the notification waiting flag is off (step S546; No), it is determined whether or not the previous notification buffer value provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is “0”. (Step S548). At this time, if the previous notification buffer value is “0” (step S548; Yes), it is determined whether or not the total number of changes notified by the change number notification command is “1” (step S549). At this time, if the total number of fluctuations is “1” (step S549; Yes), the notification waiting flag is set to the on state (step S550).

  When it is determined in step S549 that the total number of fluctuations is other than “1” (step S549; No), after executing the process of step S550, the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the specific effect. It is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern with no (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), it is determined whether the specific effect is “pseudo-continuous” or other specific effects (step S552).

  After executing the process of step S547, or when it is determined in step S548 that the previous notification buffer value is other than “0” (step S548; No), in step S552, the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is obtained. If it is determined that there is (step S552; Yes), the notification pattern determination table 164 shown in FIG. 27 is selected and set as a use table (step S553).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S553, the notification pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S554). Specifically, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR6 for determining the notification pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. At this time, the previous notification buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is read. Then, based on the numeric data indicating the extracted random value SR6, the fluctuation pattern, and the previous notification buffer value, the notification pattern is notified to the notification HP1-1 to notification HP1- by referring to the notification pattern determination table 164 set in step S553. 3. Notification HP 2-1 to notification HP 2-3, notification HP 3-1 to notification HP 3-3, notification HP 4-1 to notification HP 4-3 are determined.

  After the determination in step S554, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the number of reserved storages notified by the reserved memory number notification command, the total number of variations notified by the variation number notification command, step S554 The previous notification buffer value is updated with the previous notification buffer update setting value in the notification pattern determination table 164 in accordance with the notification patterns of notification HP1-1 to notification HP1-3 determined in (Step S556). In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the notification pattern is any one of notification HP1-1, notification HP2-1, notification HP3-1, and notification HP4-1, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-1. Non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2, and the total number of reserved memories is “1” to If it is “8” and the total number of fluctuations is “2” or “3”, the previous notification buffer value is set to “1”. The notification pattern is any one of notification HP1-2, notification HP2-2, notification HP3-2, and notification HP4-2, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach. One of the reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, and non-reach PC1-2, the total number of reserved storages is any one of “1” to “8”, and the total number of fluctuations is When it is either “2” or “3”, the previous notification buffer value is set to “2”. The notification pattern is any one of notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3, and notification HP4-3, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach. One of the reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, and non-reach PC1-2, the total number of reserved storages is any one of “1” to “8”, and the total number of fluctuations is When it is either “2” or “3”, the previous notification buffer value is set to “3”. Otherwise, the previous notification buffer value is set to “0”.

  By executing the process of step S556 in this manner, notification HP1-1 to notification HP1-3, notification HP2-1 to notification HP2-3, notification HP3-1 to notification HP3-3, prepared for each type of effect operation, Each time the notification pattern of notification HP4-1 to notification HP4-3 is determined, the determined notification HP1-1 to notification HP1-3, notification HP2-1 to notification HP2-3, notification HP3-1 to notification HP3-1. The notification buffer value corresponding to the notification HP 3-3 and the notification HP 4-1 to the notification HP 4-3 can be updated so as to be set. That is, each time the effect operation is determined as one of a plurality of types, the determined type of effect operation can be stored as a previous notification buffer value so as to be updatable. Then, in the process of step S554, the previous notification buffer value is read and determined using the notification pattern determination table 164 as shown in FIG. 27, so that it is the same as the type of effect operation stored as the previous notification buffer value. The notification pattern can be determined so that various types of performance operations are performed.

  When it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “pseudo-continuous” (step S552; No), after executing the process of step S556, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the specific effect. It is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern with no (step S557). If the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S557; No), after determining a temporary stop symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect (step S558), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S558, as an example, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is set, first, the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation is set to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S554. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. If the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 29A is selected and set as a use table, while the fluctuation pattern is super PA3-2 to super PA2. PA3-4, super PA3-6 to super PA3-8, super PA4-3, super PA4-4, super PA4-7, super PA4-8, super PA5-3, super PA5-4, super PB3-3, super In the case of any of PB3-4, super PB4-3, super PB4-4, super PB5-3, super PB5-4, super PF1-1, special PG1-2, and special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. In contrast, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 29C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 29D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S558 is terminated.

  As another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 31 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the development chance is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3 that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 are displayed. Determine the combination.

  If it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), or if it is determined in step S557 that the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S557; Yes). Then, the specific effect setting process is finished as it is.

  After executing the specific effect setting process as described above in step S514 shown in FIG. 53, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S571). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S571; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S571 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probable” (step S571; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S572). Subsequently, for example, numeric data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S573). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S573, referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A set in step S572, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first certain change”. The presence / absence of the changing promotion effect is determined depending on which one is “third probability variation” (step S574). At this time, when it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S575; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S575; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S576, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 32 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR2, the decorative symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  After executing the changing promotion effect setting process as described above in step S515 shown in FIG. 53, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S516). In this notice effect setting process, referring to the notice pattern determination table 171 shown in FIG. 33, the notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types according to the change pattern and the total number of changes. As an example, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-7, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2, normal PA2. -1, Normal PA2-3, Super PA3-1, Super PA3-5, Super PA4-1, Super PA4-5, Super PA5-1, Super PB3-1, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-1, Super PB5 -1, Super PC3-1, Super PC3-3, Super PC4-1, Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1, Super PE1-1, Super PF1-2, Special PG1-1, Special PG1-4, Special PG2 -1, special PG2-3, special PG3-1, special PG3-2, depending on the total number of fluctuations Notice patterns without notice, or is determined to either the notice YP1-1~ notice YP1-3. Specifically, when the total number of changes is “1”, it is determined without notice, and when the total number of changes is “2”, it is determined as a notice pattern of notice YP1-1. When the total number of changes is “3”, it is determined as the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2. When the total number of changes is “4”, it is determined as the notice pattern of the notice YP1-3.

  As another example, when the fluctuation pattern is any one of non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, and special PG1-2, the notice pattern is notice YP2- according to the total number of changes. 1 to notice YP2-3. Specifically, when the total number of changes is “2”, it is determined as the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1, and when the total number of changes is “3”, it is determined as the notice pattern of the notice YP2-2. When the total number of fluctuations is “4”, the notice pattern of notice YP2-3 is determined.

  As another example, the variation pattern is Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, In the case of one of the special PGs 1-3, the notice pattern is determined as either the notice YP3-1 or the notice YP3-2 according to the total number of changes. Specifically, when the total number of changes is “3”, it is determined as the notice pattern of the notice YP3-1, and when the total number of changes is “4”, it is determined as the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2.

  Furthermore, as another example, the variation pattern is super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, If it is one of the super PF1-1, the notice pattern of the notice YP4-1 is determined.

  After executing the notice effect setting process as described above in step S516 shown in FIG. 53, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S517). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result designated by the variable display result notification command, or the promotion effect during variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. In response to the presence / absence or the like, one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 34 is selected and set as a use pattern. Further, for example, a plurality of types of notification effects stored in the notification effect control pattern table 183 shown in FIG. 35 corresponding to the total number of changes notified by the change number notification command, the notification pattern determined in step S514, or the like. One of the control patterns is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, for example, corresponding to the notice pattern determined in step S516, one of a plurality of kinds of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 36 is selected and set as a use pattern. To do.

  Following the processing in step S517, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S517. Is set (step S518). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left” and “middle” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are provided. , The decorative symbols start to change in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the color symbols change in either the “left” or “right” colored symbol display areas 5A, 5B. Is set to start the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 (step S519). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S520), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  In the decorative symbol variation setting process, for example, before the process of step S519 is performed, a process of determining a definite color symbol may be performed. At this time, depending on which of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is transmitted from the main board 11, the determined color symbols in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are displayed. decide. For example, in the case of determining the determined color symbol in the “left” color symbol display area 5A according to the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “ In the case of determining the color design of “blue” and determining the determined color design in the “right” color design display area 5B, the color design of “red” or “blue” may be determined.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit control effect processing executed in step S164 of FIG. In the effect processing during the big hit control, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S601). At this time, if a hit end designation command is received (step S601; Yes), a setting for ending the big hit effect that is performed corresponding to the big hit game state is set (step S602), and the value of the production process flag is set. After updating to “6” corresponding to the ending effect process (step S603), the big hit control effect process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S602, a predetermined display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, a predetermined sound effect signal is transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a predetermined electrical decoration signal is transmitted. It is only necessary to perform control to end the effect operation that is the effect during the big hit by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 or the like.

  If no hit end designation command is received in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not a promotion effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S604). . Here, the promotion effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process of step S612 described later, while being cleared to an off state by executing a process of step S616. Even when the process of step S602 is executed, the promotion effect flag may be cleared and turned off.

  If the flag for promotion effect is OFF in step S604 (step S604; No), for example, depending on whether or not the effect control process timer value matches a predetermined effect start determination value, etc. It is determined whether or not the execution timing has come (step S605). Here, in the big hit state of 2 rounds, since the execution period of each round is short, the effect control process timer value may be set so as not to reach the effect start determination value.

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; Yes), the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 28B is selected as the use table. Set (step S606). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the promotion effect execution random number SR5 is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S607). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S607, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” by referring to the jackpot middle promotion effect execution determination table 165B. Depending on whether it is, it is decided whether or not there is a jackpot promotion promotion, and if there is a jackpot promotion promotion decision whether to make a jackpot promotion promotion success or a jackpot promotion promotion failure, etc. A determination regarding the execution of the effect is made (step S608).

  When it is determined in step S605 that it is not the execution timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S605; No), or when it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect in step S608 (step S609; Yes). ), A setting is made to execute an effect operation that is an effect during the big hit according to the number of rounds that is the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state (step S610). As an example, in the processing of step S610, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 rounds big hit or sudden / small hit transmitted from the main board 11. When the number of rounds is updated, the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 37, and the effect control process timer is set. Then, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, supplying a display control command to the display control unit 123, transmitting a sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, By transmitting a signal to the lamp control board 14, an effect operation that is an effect during a big hit is executed. After executing the processing of step S610, the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  In the processing of step S610, when setting corresponding to the fact that the designation command for opening the big prize opening for accuracy / small hit is transmitted from the main board 11, it is executed immediately before the big hit gaming state is entered. Depending on the variation pattern type into which the variation pattern in the variable display of decorative symbols is classified, settings for executing different rendering operations may be performed. As an example, a variation pattern type common to the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in accordance with the variation patterns classified into “2” and controlled to the big-hit state for two rounds, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-2 and hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. The effect control patterns to be sequentially used are selected and read out, and the effect operation is set according to the effect control patterns. On the other hand, the decorative pattern by the variation pattern classified into the dedicated variation pattern type only when the big hit type is “surprise”, such as the variation pattern types of special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. When the game is controlled to the 2 round big hit game state after the variable display is performed, as the effect control pattern that sequentially uses the effect control pattern of the hit start CST2-1 and the hit control CRE1-1 shown in FIG. Select and read out, and set the production operation according to those production control patterns.

  If it is determined in step S608 to execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S609; No), settings for starting the jackpot promotion effect are performed (step S611). As an example, in the process of step S611, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is specified from the big win opening open designation command for 15 round big hits transmitted from the main board 11. Then, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion effect corresponding to the specified number of rounds is read from the various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. At this time, for example, the value of the notification content buffer (notification content buffer value) provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 is set according to which of the big success promotion effect and the big success failure promotion effect is executed. It may be. As a specific example, the notification content buffer value is set to “1” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, while the notification content buffer value is set to “0” when executing the jackpot promotion promotion effect. Set to. Then, after setting the promotion effect in-progress flag to the on state (step S612), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S604 that the promoted effect flag is on (step S604; Yes), for example, does the effect control process timer value match the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern? Depending on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the end timing of promotion effect during jackpot is reached (step S613). At this time, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; No), settings are made to control the rendering operation that becomes the jackpot promotion effect (step S614). As an example, in the process of step S614, according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the production operation that becomes the promotion effect during the big hit, for example, by transmitting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S614, the big hit control effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S613 that it is the end timing of the jackpot promotion effect (step S613; Yes), settings are made to end the jackpot promotion effect (step S615), and the flag for the promotion effect is cleared. Then, after the off state is set (step S616), the big hit control effect processing is terminated.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect process executed in step S166 of FIG. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S631). Here, the ending effect in-progress flag is set to an on state by executing a process in step S638 described later, and is cleared to an off state by executing a process in step S641.

  When the ending effect flag is OFF in step S631 (step S631; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the big hit type is “normal”. It is determined whether or not it is a certain big hit (step S632). At this time, if it is not the normal big hit (step S632; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S633). If the jackpot type is “third probability variation” (step S633; Yes), the promotion success effect has been executed from the notification content buffer value stored in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. It is determined whether or not (step S634). As an example, when the notification content buffer value is “1”, it is determined that the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed, and when the notification content buffer value is “0”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. What is necessary is just to determine that it is not.

  When it is determined in step S633 that the jackpot type is other than “third probability variation” (step S633; No), or when it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has been executed (step S634). ; Yes), a setting for starting a production operation to be a predetermined non-promotion ending production is performed (step S635). As an example, in the process of step S635, it is determined whether the 15 round big hit state or the 2 round big hit state ends by reading the EXT data of the hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Then, according to the determination result of the jackpot gaming state to be finished, the effect control pattern that does not execute the promotion effect is read from the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 37, and the effect control process timer is set.

  If it is determined in step S634 that the promotion success effect has not been executed (step S634; No), a setting is made to start the effect operation that becomes the ending promotion success effect (step S636). As an example, in the process of step S636, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion success effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  If it is determined in step S632 that it is a normal big hit (step S632; Yes), a setting is made to start an effect operation that becomes an ending promotion failure effect (step S637). As an example, in the process of step S637, in response to the end of the 15th round big hit state, an effect control pattern for executing the promotion failure effect is read from various effect control pattern tables 182 and an effect control process timer is set. .

  After executing any of the processes in steps S635 to S637, the ending effect flag is set to the on state (step S638), and the ending effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S631 that the ending effect flag is on (step S631; Yes), for example, the effect control process timer value matches the effect end determination value indicated in the effect control pattern? It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect depending on whether or not it is (step S639). Here, the ending effect is an effect operation executed in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, including an unpromoted ending effect, an ending promotion success effect, and an ending promotion failure effect.

  If it is determined in step S639 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; No), settings are made to control the effect operation that will be the ending effect (step S640). As an example, in the process of step S640, the display control command is supplied to the display control unit 123 according to the control data read from the effect control pattern according to the effect control process timer value, and the sound effect signal is sent to the sound control board 13. It is only necessary to control the rendering operation as an ending effect by transmitting the illumination signal or transmitting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14. After executing the process of step S640, the ending effect process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S639 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (step S639; Yes), for example, the ending effect flag is cleared and turned off, and the display control unit 123 Ending effects such as supplying a predetermined display control command, transmitting a predetermined sound effect signal to the sound control board 13, and transmitting a predetermined electrical signal to the lamp control board 14. Is set to end the process (step S641). At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variation start command reception waiting process (step S642), and then the ending effect process ends.

  Next, specific examples of various effects operations centering on variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 will be described.

  In FIG. 60, after the special symbol and decorative symbol variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, the special symbol and decorative symbol are variably displayed. The example of the production | presentation operation | movement in the case of the variable display of the special design and decoration design which the variable display result of a decoration design is "losing" is shown.

  In the main board 11, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5 in step S276 shown in FIG. 44, the total fluctuation count count value is incremented by 2 and updated to “2” in step S281. After that, by the setting in step S278, as shown in FIG. 60A, the variation of the special symbol is started in either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, by the setting in step S279, a change pattern designation command for designating a change pattern of non-reach PA 1-5 or a change count notification for specifying the total change count “2” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Commands etc. are sent sequentially.

  On the other hand, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the total reserved memory number notified by the reserved memory number notification command in step S521 shown in FIG. 53 is other than “0”, for example, step S522. Since the total number of changes notified by the change number notification command is determined to be “2” and other than “0”, any one of pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is configured in step S523. A combination of finalized symbols that will be the final stop symbol is determined.

  Next, in the specific effect setting process in step S514, if it is determined in step S547 shown in FIG. 55 that the previous notification buffer value is “0”, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is non-reach PA1. Since it is −5, it is determined in step S554 as one of the notification patterns of notification HP2-1 to notification HP2-3. If the notification pattern of notification HP 2-1 is determined in step S554, the previous notification buffer value is set to “1”. Further, in the notice effect setting processing in step S516, since the change pattern is non-reach PA1-5 and the total number of changes is “2”, it is determined as the notice pattern of notice YP2-1.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, the symbol variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA 1-5 is selected and set as the usage pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-5. When the notification pattern of the notification HP 2-1 is determined in step S514, the total number of changes is “2”, so the notification effect control pattern of the notification CHP2-1-1 is selected as the usage pattern. Set. Further, since the notice pattern of the notice YP2-1 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  In the process of step S519, a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA1-5 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the like in FIG. As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern variation (first variation) occurs in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Be started.

  After that, the image display device 5 sequentially displays the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “2”, “3”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. As shown in FIG. 60 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance eye GC2 are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a decorative pattern fluctuation display is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Change).

  At the start of such second variation, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP2-1-1 is given to the voice control board 13 as shown in FIG. As a result of the supply, a “do” sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP2-1 is displayed. For example, the effect image of the first step is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 60D, either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B has a symbol “-” that becomes a lost symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. And a special symbol indicating “4”, “5”, “5” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance GC4 are stopped and displayed (final stop display). At this time, for example, the decorative design may be displayed in a swinging manner so as to make it appear as if the decorative design is temporarily stopped.

  When the CPU 103 on the main board 11 determines the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in, for example, step S276 shown in FIG. 44 after the second variation is completed, the total variation count is counted in step S281. After the value is incremented by 1 and updated to “3”, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is set according to the setting in step S278. Then, the special symbol changes. Further, by the setting in step S279, a change pattern designation command for designating a change pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 and a change count notification for specifying the total change count “3” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Commands etc. are sent sequentially.

  On the other hand, in the effect control board 12, if the effect control CPU 120 determines that the total reserved memory number notified by the reserved memory number notification command is “0” in step S521 shown in FIG. 53, for example, the process proceeds to step S505. Thus, the combination of the definite decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined.

  Next, in the specific effect setting process in step S514, it is determined in step S547 shown in FIG. 55 that the previous notification buffer value is “1” and other than “0”, and is designated by the variation pattern designation command. Since the changed pattern is non-reach PA1-1, the notification pattern of notification HP1-1 is determined in step S554. Since the total reserved storage number is “0”, the previous notification buffer value is set to “0” in step S556. Further, in the notice effect setting process of step S516, since the change pattern is non-reach PA1-1 and the total number of changes is “3”, the notice pattern is determined as the notice pattern YP1-2.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, the symbol variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA 1-1 is selected and set as the usage pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1. When the notification pattern of notification HP1-1 is determined in step S514, the notification effect control pattern of notification CHP1-1-2 is selected as the usage pattern because the total number of changes is “3”. Set. Furthermore, since the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Then, in the process of step S519, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA1-1 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the like in FIG. As shown in the figure, variations in the decorative symbols (third variation) occur in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5. Be started.

  At the start of such third change, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP1-1-2 is given to the voice control board 13 as shown in FIG. As a result of the supply or the like, the sound “L” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is displayed on the display control unit 123. The effect image of the second step is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (F), either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B has a symbol “-” that becomes a lost symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. And a special symbol indicating “6”, “7”, “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the symbols are stopped and displayed sequentially (temporary stop display), the fixed decorative symbols constituting the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 103 on the main board 11 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal PA 2-1 at step S276 shown in FIG. 44 after the second fluctuation, for example, the total number of fluctuations at step S281. After the count value is incremented by 1 and updated to “3”, either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is set as shown in FIG. 60 (G) by the setting in step S278. Then, the change of the special symbol is started. In addition, according to the setting in step S279, for the main control board 11 to the effect control board 12, a change pattern specifying command for specifying the change pattern of the normal PA 2-1 and a change count notification command for specifying the total change count “3”. Etc. are sent sequentially.

  On the other hand, on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination, for example, in step S506 shown in FIG.

  Next, in the specific effect setting process in step S514, it is determined in step S547 shown in FIG. 55 that the previous notification buffer value is “1” and other than “0”, and is designated by the variation pattern designation command. Since the fluctuation pattern is normal PA2-1, the notification pattern of notification HP1-1 is determined in step S554. The variation pattern is normal PA2-1, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach. Since it is not PC1-2, the previous notification buffer value is set to “0” in step S556. Further, in the notice effect setting process in step S516, since the change pattern is normal PA2-1 and the total number of changes is “3”, the notice pattern is determined as the notice pattern YP1-2.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, the symbol variation control pattern of the normal CPA2-1 is selected and set as the usage pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal PA2-1. When the notification pattern of notification HP1-1 is determined in step S514, the notification effect control pattern of notification CHP1-1-2 is selected as the usage pattern because the total number of changes is “3”. Set. Furthermore, since the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  In the process of step S519, a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern of the normal CPA 2-1 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the like as shown in FIG. In this way, the decorative pattern variation (third variation) starts in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5 as described above. Is done.

  At the start of such third change, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP1-1-2 is given to the voice control board 13 as shown in FIG. As a result of the supply or the like, the sound “L” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is displayed on the display control unit 123. The effect image of the second step is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state. Then, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 60 (H), a “normal” reach effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (I), either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B has a symbol “-” that becomes a lost symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. Is displayed in a stopped state, and the image display device 5 displays a decorative symbol display area 5L in which “5” in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is “left” and “right”. After the stop display (temporary stop display) together with 5R, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are stopped (final stop display).

  61 and 62, after the variable symbol display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is “losing”, and the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach”, the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed. The example of the production | presentation operation | movement in the case where the variable display of the special symbol and decoration design whose variable display result of the special symbol and decoration design is “big hit” is performed is shown.

  In the main board 11, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in step S276 shown in FIG. 44, the total fluctuation count count value is incremented by 1 and updated to “1” in step S281. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the change in the special symbol is started in either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B by the setting in step S278. Further, by the setting in step S279, a change pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 or a variation count notification for designating the total variation count “1” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Commands etc. are sent sequentially.

  On the other hand, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the total reserved memory number notified by the reserved memory number notification command in step S521 shown in FIG. 53 is other than “0”, for example, step S522. Since the total number of changes notified by the change number notification command is determined to be “1” and other than “0”, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is configured in step S523. A combination of finalized symbols that will be the final stop symbol is determined.

  Next, in the specific effect setting process of step S514, when it is determined in step S547 shown in FIG. Therefore, in step S549, the notification waiting flag is set to the on state. Further, in the notice effect setting process of step S516, since the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is non-reach PA1-1 and the total number of fluctuations is “1”, it is determined without notice.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, the design variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA 1-1 is selected and set as the use pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1. In the process of step S519, for example, a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern of the non-reach CPA1-1 is supplied to the display control unit 123. As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative symbols change in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5 (first variation). To start.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B), either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B has a symbol “-” that becomes a lost symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. And a special symbol indicating “2”, “3”, “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the symbols are stopped and displayed sequentially (temporary stop display), the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance GC2 are stopped and displayed (final stop display).

  When the CPU 103 on the main board 11 determines the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 at step S276 shown in FIG. 44 after the first variation is completed, the total variation count value at step S281. Is added to 3 and updated to “4”, and then, in the setting in step S278, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol changes. In addition, by the setting in step S279, for the main control board 11 to the effect control board 12, a change pattern specifying command for specifying the change pattern of the super PA 4-3 and a change count notification command for specifying the total change count “4”. Etc. are sent sequentially.

  On the other hand, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120, for example, in the step S511 shown in FIG. 53, the jackpot type notified by the variable display result notification command is either “normal jackpot” or “third probability change”. When it determines with it being one, the combination of the fixed decoration symbol used as the last stop symbol which comprises a normal jackpot combination is determined in step S512.

  Next, in the specific effect setting process in step S514, it is determined in step S546 shown in FIG. 55 that the notification waiting flag is on, and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is super PA4-3. Therefore, in step S554, any one of the notification patterns of notification HP3-1 to notification HP3-3 is determined. Further, in the notice effect setting processing in step S516, since the change pattern is Super PA4-3 and the total number of changes is “4”, the notice pattern is determined to be notice YP3-2.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, super CPA 4-3-1, super CPA 4 corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Any of the symbol variation control patterns of -3-2 is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, when the notification pattern of notification HP 3-3 is determined in step S514, since the total number of changes is “4”, the notification effect control pattern of notification CHP3-3-2 is selected as the usage pattern. Set. Furthermore, since the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  In the process of step S519, a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in any of the symbol variation control patterns of the super CPA 4-3-1 and the super CPA 4-3-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123. As shown in FIG. 61C, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5 The decoration pattern variation (second variation) is started.

  At the start of such second fluctuation, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP3-3-2 is given to the voice control board 13 as shown in FIG. As a result, the “do” sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of the notification CHP3-3-2 is output from the lamp control board. 14 or the like, only one of the three game effect lamps 9 is turned on. Further, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the first step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed.

  Thereafter, the image display device 5 sequentially stops and displays decorative symbols indicating the numbers “4”, “5”, and “5” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Display), the decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance GC4 are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) as shown in FIG. 61 (D). At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a decorative symbol fluctuation display is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Fluctuation) is started.

  At the start of such third variation, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP3-3-2 is given to the voice control board 13 as shown in FIG. As a result of the supply, a “le” sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of the notification CHP3-3-2 is output to the lamp control board. For example, two of the three game effect lamps 9 are turned on. In addition, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the second step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed.

  After that, the image display device 5 sequentially stops and displays decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “7” in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. Display), as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the decorative symbols constituting the quasi-continuous chance eye GC6 are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). At this time, for example, a temporary stop display such as a decorative symbol fluctuation display is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Fluctuation) is started.

  At the start of such fourth variation, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP3-3-2 is given to the voice control board 13 as shown in FIG. 61 (G). As a result of the supply, the sound of “mi” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of the notification CHP3-3-2 is issued. All three game effect lamps are turned on. Further, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the third step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61H, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state. Then, after reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 61 (H), reach effects α1 as shown in FIGS. 61 (I) to (K) are performed.

  Here, if the jackpot type notified by the variable display result notification command is “ordinary jackpot” and it is determined in step S574 shown in FIG. 57 that the changing promotion effect is not executed, FIG. ), A special symbol indicating a symbol “3” which is a 15-round jackpot symbol as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game on either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5 as a finalized stop symbol (final stop display).

  On the other hand, if the jackpot type notified by the variable display result notification command is “third probability change” and it is determined in step S574 shown in FIG. 57 to execute the changing promotion effect, As shown in 62 (B), the symbol “7”, which is a 15-round jackpot symbol, is displayed as a confirmed special symbol in either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol to be displayed is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), it is changed again in a state where the same decorative symbols are aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the jackpot type being “third probability change”, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the decorative design displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. After that, the promotion success effect during change is performed in which the fixed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed. For example, if the jackpot type notified by the variable display result notification command is “ordinary jackpot” and it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect in step S574 shown in FIG. 57, the changing promotion failure occurs. After the effect is executed and the decorative symbols are re-variable as shown in FIG. 62 (C), for example, as in FIG. .

  FIG. 63 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In FIG. 63 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 63 (B) to 63 (D), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of chance TC1 is stopped (final stop display). At this time, as a big hit effect in the two round big hit state, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), an effect image for notifying the transition to a special effect mode such as the LIVE mode is displayed. Then, as an ending effect in response to the end of the two round big hit state, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 63 (F) is displayed, and the display enabling recognition of the LIVE mode is shown in FIG. 63, for example. As shown in (G), the display is kept displayed even after the next decorative pattern change is started.

  As described above, in this embodiment, for example, on the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes of steps S239 and S246 shown in FIG. By determining whether or not matches the jackpot decision value data, the variable display result is derived and displayed as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit” Decide before. In the process of step S268 shown in FIG. 44, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed based on the determination that the jackpot flag is off in step S261 in response to the determination result that the game is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Decide whether to reach reach. Then, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol is set to one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, the determination result of whether to reach the reach state, or the like. decide. Subsequently, in the process of step S276, the determination result in step S273, the number of executions of the variable display of decorative symbols, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous change performed during that time, the total number of changes, etc. Based on this, the decorative pattern variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. Further, in the process of step S281, the total variation count value is updated based on the determination result in step S276. Thereafter, on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, the reserved control number notification command, the change count notification command, the change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 by the effect control CPU 120, etc. Accordingly, by executing the decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 and the decorative symbol variable process in step S162 shown in FIG. 52, various types of decorative symbols are displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the determination result in step S276. The control for executing the effect operation is performed.

  Here, when the total variation count value is “0”, the CPU 103 on the main board 11 side performs non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PB1-1, in step S276 shown in FIG. When a non-reach variation pattern that does not execute a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect such as non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2, etc. is determined, the total variation count value is incremented by 1 in step S281. And updated to “1”. On the side of the effect control board 12, if it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 determines that the total reserved memory number notified by the reserved memory number notification command is other than “0” in step S521 shown in FIG. Since the total number of changes notified by the change number notification command in S522 is “1” and is determined to be other than “0”, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is configured in Step S523. The combination of the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the decorative symbol variation process in step S162 shown in FIG. 52, whereby the decorative symbol is displayed in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “medium”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the confirmed decorative symbol constituting any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is stopped (final stop display).

  Here, at step S276 shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 103 on the main board 11 side, for example, normal PA2-1, normal PA2-3, normal PA2-5, normal PA2-7, super PA3-1, super PA3-5, Super PA4-1, Super PA4-5, Super PA5-1, Super PB3-1, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-1, Super PB5-1, Super PC3-1, Super PC3-3, Super PC4-1, When the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect is determined without executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effects such as the super PC 4-2, the super PD 1-1, the super PE 1-1, and the super PF 1-2, in step S281. The total variation count value is incremented by 1 and updated to “2”. Since the previous notification buffer value is “0” on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 notifies any one of notification HP1-1 to notification HP1-3 in step S546 shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern. Further, in the notice effect setting process of step S516 shown in FIG. 53, since the total number of changes notified by the change number notification command is “2”, the notice pattern of notice YP1-1 is determined.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, the symbol variation shown in FIG. 34 is performed corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Any of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the control pattern table 180 is selected and set as a usage pattern. 53, when the notification pattern of notification HP1-3 is determined in step S514 shown in FIG. 53, since the total number of fluctuations is “2”, the notification effect control pattern of notification CHP1-3-1 is used. It is selected and set as a pattern. Further, since the notice pattern of notice YP3-2 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of notice CYP1-1 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  In the process of step S519, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in any of the symbol variation control patterns set in step S517 is supplied to the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the apparatus 5.

  In this way, when variable display of decorative symbols is started, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP1-3-1 set in step S517 is given to the voice control board 13. Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of the notification CHP3-3-2 is supplied to the lamp control. Only one of the three game effect lamps 9 is turned on by being supplied to the substrate 14 or the like. In addition, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-1 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the display area of the image display device 5 has the first step. The effect image is displayed. That is, the variable display of the decorative design in which the reach effect is executed without executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” is performed following the variable display of the decorative design in which neither the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” and the reach effect are executed. When started, the display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, By performing output of sound from 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the like, notification is made as if the first pseudo continuous fluctuation is started.

  In this way, even if the reach effect is executed without actually executing the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, the decorative design variable that does not execute both the previous “pseudo-ream” specific effect and reach effect is variable. Combined with the display, the player's expectation that the variable display result of the decorative pattern will be a “big hit” by appearing as if the reach production was executed by developing from a specific production of “pseudo-ream” Because it can, you can improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, after executing the specific effect of “pseudo-ream”, following the variable display of the decorative pattern that displays the final decorative pattern constituting the non-reach combination (final stop display), When executing the reach effect without executing the specific effect of “pseudo ream”, and performing the variable display of the decorative pattern for executing the stop display (final stop display) of the confirmed decorative pattern constituting the jackpot combination, this 2 Since it is not possible to associate the variable display of the three decorative symbols, the game effect becomes sudden and there is a risk of reducing the game entertainment. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the start of variable display of the latter decorative design, display of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 and output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R By giving notification as if the pseudo-variation starts when the game effect lamp 9 is turned on, etc., it is possible to give relevance to the variable display of the two decorative symbols, thus improving the gaming interest Can be made.

  Further, notification as if the first pseudo continuous fluctuation is started by displaying the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Is performed at the start of variable display of decorative symbols after the reserved storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is updated. In this way, the notification in the start winning memory display area 5H is made by notifying at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but notifying that the first pseudo continuous variation starts at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the player from determining from the stored display whether the pseudo continuous variation has started or whether a new decorative symbol variable display has started. Furthermore, if the start winning memory display area 5H and the game effect lamp 9 are provided so as to be separated from each other so that the player can view them simultaneously, it is more effective whether the quasi-continuous variation has started, It is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the variable display has been started.

  On the other hand, at step S276 shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 103 on the main board 11 side, for example, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB3- 3. When a variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, etc., for which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is two, is determined in step S281. The variation count value is incremented by 3 and updated to “4”. Then, on the side of the effect control board 12, since the previous notification buffer value is “0”, the effect control CPU 120 notifies any one of notification HP3-1 to notification HP3-3 in step S546 shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern. Also, in the notice effect setting process of step S516 shown in FIG. 53, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3. , Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, and the total number of changes notified by the change count notification command is “4”. The notice pattern is decided.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, the symbol variation shown in FIG. 34 is performed corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Any of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the control pattern table 180 is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, when the notification pattern of notification HP 3-3 is determined in step S514 shown in FIG. 53, since the total number of changes is “4”, the notification effect control pattern of notification CHP3-3-2 is used. It is selected and set as a pattern. Furthermore, since the notice pattern of the notice YP3-2 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  In the process of step S519, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in any of the symbol variation control patterns set in step S517 is supplied to the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the apparatus 5.

  When the decorative display variable display is started in this manner, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP3-3-2 set in step S517 is issued to the voice control board 13. Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of the notification CHP3-3-2 is supplied to the lamp control. Only one of the three game effect lamps 9 is turned on by being supplied to the substrate 14 or the like. In addition, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the display area of the image display device 5 has the first step. The effect image is displayed. That is, after the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern constituting any one of the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 is stopped (final stop display) without executing the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, Subsequently, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the display of the image display device 5 is performed in the same manner as when the execution of the first pseudo continuous variation is started with the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. By displaying the effect image in the area, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, and the like, notification is made as if the first pseudo continuous variation is started.

  Thereafter, when the decorative symbol constituting any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is stopped (temporarily stopped) and execution of the first pseudo continuous variation is started, the notification CHP3-3-3- When the audio control command corresponding to the audio control data included in the notification effect control pattern 2 is supplied to the audio control board 13 or the like, the audio “L” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the notification CHP3- Two of the three game effect lamps 9 are turned on by supplying a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the 3-2 notification effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the second step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed. In other words, after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the finalized decorative symbols constituting any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 are stopped (final stop display) without executing the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, Following this, in the variable display of decorative symbols, when the execution of the first pseudo continuous variation is started, the second execution of the pseudo continuous variation is started with the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. In the same manner as in the above, the second pseudo continuous variation is performed by displaying the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Notification is performed as if starting.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol whose decorative symbol constitutes any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is stopped (temporarily stopped) and execution of the second pseudo continuous variation is started, the notification CHP3-3-3- When the audio control command corresponding to the audio control data included in the notification effect control pattern 2 is supplied to the audio control board 13 or the like, the audio “mi” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the notification CHP3- All of the three game effect lamps 9 are turned on by supplying a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the 3-2 notification effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP3-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the third step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed. In other words, after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the finalized decorative symbols constituting any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 are stopped (final stop display) without executing the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, Following this, in the variable display of decorative symbols started, when the execution of the second pseudo continuous variation is started, the execution of the third pseudo continuous variation is started with the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. In the same manner as above, the third pseudo continuous variation is performed by displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, and the like. Notification is performed as if starting.

  In this manner, the decorative design variable display in which the fixed decorative design constituting any one of the pseudo continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is stopped and displayed (final stop display) without executing the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. In the variable display of the decorative pattern started after this, the decorative pattern is notified by performing a notification as if the pseudo continuous variation more than the actual number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is started. Since the player's sense of expectation that the variable display result can be a “hit”, it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

  When the total variation count value is “0”, the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11 side performs super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8 in step S276 shown in FIG. , A variation pattern for executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” with three executions of pseudo-continuous variation such as Super PA5-4, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, etc. When determined, the total variation count value is incremented by 4 and updated to “4” in step S281. Since the previous notification buffer value is “0” on the side of the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 notifies any one of the notification HP4-1 to notification HP4-3 in step S546 shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern. Also, in the notice effect setting process of step S516 shown in FIG. 53, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PA5-4. Therefore, it is determined to be a notice pattern of notice YP4-1 because it is one of super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, or super PF1-1.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517, the symbol variation shown in FIG. 34 is performed corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Any of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the control pattern table 180 is selected and set as a usage pattern. When the notification HP4-3 notification pattern is determined in step S514 shown in FIG. 53, the notification CHP4-3-1 notification effect control pattern is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, since the notice pattern of the notice YP4-1 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP4-1 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  In the process of step S519, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in any of the symbol variation control patterns set in step S517 is supplied to the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the apparatus 5.

  Thereafter, when the decorative symbol whose decorative symbol constitutes any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is stopped (temporarily stopped) and execution of the first pseudo continuous variation is started, the notification CHP4-3- When a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in one notification effect control pattern is supplied to the voice control board 13 or the like, a “do” voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a notification CHP4- Only one of the three game effect lamps 9 is turned on by supplying a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of 3-1 to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP4-1 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the first step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the decorative symbol whose decorative symbol constitutes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is stopped (temporarily stopped) and execution of the second pseudo continuous variation is started, the notification CHP4-3- When the voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the one notification effect control pattern is supplied to the voice control board 13 or the like, the sound “L” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the notification CHP4- Two of the three game effect lamps 9 are turned on by supplying a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of 3-1 to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP4-1 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the second step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed.

  When the decorative symbol whose decorative symbol constitutes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the execution of the third pseudo continuous variation is started, the notification CHP4-3- When the voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the one notification effect control pattern is supplied to the voice control board 13, the voice of “mi” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the notification CHP4- All of the three game effect lamps 9 are turned on, for example, by supplying a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern 3-1 to the lamp control board 14. In addition, a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP4-1 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the third step effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. An image is displayed.

  In this way, each time the execution of the pseudo continuous variation is started, the effect images of the first step to the third step are switched in order from the first step and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, thereby Since the effect image corresponding to the number of executions of the variation can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, as the pseudo continuous variation is continuously executed, the number of steps in the notice effect is increased, The expectation of the player can be increased. As a result, not only the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 but also the display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the variable display result of the decorative design becomes “big hit”. Since the player's sense of expectation can be raised, the game interest can be further improved.

  In the setting of the notification pattern determination table 164 shown in FIG. 27, when the previous notification buffer value is “0”, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. Among the variation patterns, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing”, the value in the range of “1” to “70” among the random value SR6 for determining the notification pattern is the notification HP1. -1, notification HP2-1, notification HP3-1, and notification HP4-1 are assigned to one of the notification patterns, and values in the range of “71” to “130” are notification HP1-2, notification HP2-2, A value in the range of “131” to “150” is assigned to one of the notification patterns of the notification HP 3-2 and the notification HP 4-2, and the values of the notification HP 1-3, the notification HP 2-3, and the notification H 3-3 are assigned to one of the broadcast pattern of broadcast HP4-3. When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” among the variation patterns for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, the notification pattern determination Is assigned to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-1, notification HP2-1, notification HP3-1, and notification HP4-1. A value in the range of “21” to “50” is assigned to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-2, notification HP2-2, notification HP3-2, and notification HP4-2, and a range of “51” to “150”. Is assigned to one of the notification patterns of notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3, and notification HP4-3.

  With this setting, when the variable display result is “losing”, the notification HP 1-1, notification HP 1-2, notification HP 2-1 and notification HP 2-2 are compared to when the variable ideographic result is “big hit”. , Notification HP3-1, notification HP3-1, notification HP4-1, notification HP4-2, and the rate at which any one of the notification patterns is determined increases, notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3. The rate at which one of the notification patterns of the notification HP 4-3 is determined is low. For this reason, in response to any of the notification patterns of notification HP1-3, notification HP2-3, notification HP3-3, and notification HP4-3, the output mode of the sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect When the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified by the lighting / extinguishing / flashing mode of the lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the notification HP1-1, the notification HP2-1, the notification HP3-1, and the notification HP4-1. Corresponding to one of the notification patterns, when the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation is notified by the output mode of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L, 8R, notification HP1-2, notification HP2-2, notification Corresponding to the notification pattern of either HP3-2 or notification HP4-2, compared to the case where the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified by the lighting / extinction / flashing mode of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. ,Degree of reliability Possibility that the variable display result is "big hit") increases.

  Thereby, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is notified by the output mode of the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation by the lighting / extinguishing / flashing mode of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. Depending on whether or not the number of executions of pseudo-continuous change has been notified by the output mode of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting / extinguishing / flashing mode of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED As a result, the player's expectation that the decorative symbol variable display result will be “big hit” can be made different, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  Also, in the process of step S282 shown in FIG. 44, the fluctuation patterns determined in step S276 are non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-. 2. When the number is other than non-reach PC 1-1 and non-reach PC 1-2, or when the total number of reserved storage is “0”, or the total fluctuation count count value updated in step S281 is “4”. In some cases, the counter initialization flag is set to the on state. If the counter initialization flag is ON in step S289 shown in FIG. 46, the total variation count value is updated to “0” in step S290.

  Thus, the variation patterns determined in step S276 are non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, In the case of other than the non-reach PC 1-2, the total variation count value is updated to “0” after the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, so the reach effect is executed and the confirmed decoration that constitutes the reach combination. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the fixed ornament symbol constituting any one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 and the certain chance symbol TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed, the next It is possible to prevent an unnatural notification from being made as if pseudo-variation is started at the start of variable display of decorative symbols. Regardless of the variation pattern determined in step S276, in the process of step S282, the reach effect is executed by clearing the counter initialization flag and setting it to the OFF state. After the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are stopped and displayed, or the confirmed decorative symbols constituting any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 and the confirmed chance symbols TC1 to TC4 are stopped. After the display, at the start of the variable display of the next decorative design, a notification may be made as if the pseudo continuous variation is started.

  In addition, when the total number of stored storage is “0”, the total variation count value is updated to “0”, and after the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, the pseudo continuous variation is started at intervals. It is possible to prevent such an unnatural notification. Furthermore, when the total fluctuation count value is “4”, is the fourth pseudo continuous fluctuation that cannot be a normal pseudo continuous fluctuation started by updating the total fluctuation count count value to “0”? Such an unnatural notification can be prevented.

  Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 44, step S273 is performed using one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C set in step S270. By executing the above process, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns such as normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2 according to the reach state. . Further, in response to the determination that the reach state is not set in step S268, the process of step S273 is performed using any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C set in step S271. By executing, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns including non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 that execute a specific effect during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In addition, in response to the determination to reach the reach state in step S268 shown in FIG. 44, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S273, the loss variation pattern determination table 138B is used to perform step S276. By executing the process, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to “reach” is determined. 44. In step S268 shown in FIG. 44, it is determined that the reach state is not set, and the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type for executing the specific effect in step S273. In response to the determination, by executing the process of step S276 using the loss variation pattern determination table 138A, a non-reach PA 1-5 and a non-reach PA 1-7 prepared in advance to execute a specific effect. Is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  In this way, even when the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not reach the reach state, for example, it is possible to execute specific effects such as “pseudo-ream” and “end of development opportunity eyes”, enabling a variety of effects and improving game entertainment. Can do. Further, in the processing of step S273 and step S276, depending on whether or not the determination to reach the reach state is made in step S268, the change pattern type and the change pattern are determined using different determination tables, and the reach state is determined. The determination process does not compete between the case where it is set and the case where the reach state is not set. Therefore, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type used to determine the variation pattern type can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state, Further, the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern used for determining the variation pattern can be made common numerical data regardless of the determination result of whether or not to reach the reach state. As a result, the amount of processing in the process executed to update the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 and the random number value MR4 (for example, the main random number value update process in step S14 shown in FIG. 39) is reduced, and the program The amount can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration by preventing the configuration of the random number circuit 104 from becoming complicated and increasing the storage area of the random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 and the like. . Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. In the processes in steps S275 and S276, regardless of the result of determination of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by the common processing module. Thereby, the amount of programs can be reduced as compared with the case where determination is performed using different processing modules according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state. Furthermore, both the assignment of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the various variation pattern types in the variation pattern type determination table and the allocation of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern to the various variation patterns in the variation pattern determination table are performed. Even if it is not changed, if only one of them is changed, the appearance frequency of various reach effects and various specific effects can be changed, and further, the frequency of the execution frequency of the pseudo continuous variation in the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” can be changed. Therefore, the design change can be facilitated.

  In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 15A, the non-reach CA1-4 that executes a specific effect when the total number of reserved storage is greater than or equal to a predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The table data is configured such that the ratio determined for the variation pattern type is low. As a result, when the number of stored data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol or decorative design is shortened, It is possible to reduce winnings in which the start condition is not satisfied.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the classified variation pattern types. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation different from the design, and various production operations can be executed at a predetermined rate close to the design. Can be improved.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (F) and FIGS. 11 (A) to 11 (C), according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of big hit types, The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined. This makes it possible to perform different types of performance operations according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 10A to 10F and FIGS. 11A to 11C, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. The table data is configured so that different variation pattern types can be determined depending on whether or not the state is a certain variation state. Thereby, according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, different types of performance operations can be executed, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In the first special symbol display device 4, a plurality of game balls are awarded based on the fact that the first start condition is established after the game ball has won the first start prize opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first start condition is established. A special game that variably displays a special symbol to be the first special graphic of the type is executed. In the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied after the game ball has won the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting condition is satisfied, A special figure game is executed which variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of second special figures. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, in the special game using the first special figure and the second special figure in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Corresponding to the variable display, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, the CPU 103 included in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 follows a program read from the ROM 101, for example, a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. A process for controlling the progress is executed. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 follows the program read from the ROM 121, for example, in the command analysis process in step S405 and the effect control process process in step S406 shown in FIG. The process for controlling the display state of is executed. Then, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition is determined, or the second starting condition is established. Regardless of whether the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special diagram based on the determination is determined, the numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used. The variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types.

  Thus, after the variation pattern type is determined using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the determination result. By doing so, various rendering operations can be executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state. On the other hand, even when a special symbol is variably displayed by a plurality of display devices such as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the variable display, the variation is changed. Numerical data indicating a common random value MR3 is used for determining the pattern type. As a result, the processing amount in the processing (for example, the main-side random value updating processing in step S14 shown in FIG. 39) executed for updating the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 is reduced, thereby reducing the program amount. Can be planned.

  The production control CPU 120 performs the first hold display increase update setting in step S154 shown in FIG. 50, and performs the second hold display increase update setting in step S155, so that the reserved memory count notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. If any one of the first start opening winning designation command and the second starting opening winning designation command, which is the starting opening winning designation command, has been normally received when the is received, for example, as shown in FIG. In the start winning memory display area 5H, the first reserved memory number, which is the number of stored data in the first special figure storage unit 151A based on the establishment of the first start condition, and the second one based on the establishment of the second start condition. The second reserved memory number that is the number of stored hold data in the 2 special figure hold storage unit 151B can be displayed in an identifiable manner. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the progress of a game correctly.

  Further, the CPU 103 causes the first start winning prize designation command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S206 shown in FIG. 41, and then causes the pending storage number notification command to be transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S209. In addition, after the second start winning port designation command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S215, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted based on the transmission setting in step S218. Here, in the case where it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one production control command together with the total number of stored data that is the total number of stored data, for example, the total reservation When the upper limit value of the stored number is “8”, it is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. . On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The production control CPU 120 performs display update setting when no start opening winning designation is made in step S156 shown in FIG. 50, so that when the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, the starting opening winning designation is performed. Based on the determination that neither the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command as the command has been received, the display mode of the hold storage display in the start prize storage display area 5H is predetermined. The display mode is changed to a gray display as shown in FIG. 51B, for example, so that the total reserved memory number can be specified, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number cannot be specified. Can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred in the command transmission / reception operation that is performed to display the total number of reserved memories that is the total number of stored pending data.

  When it is determined that the effect control CPU 120 is the variation pattern that executes the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in the processing of steps S551 and S552 shown in FIG. 55, the notification pattern is notified to the HP 1-1 in step S554. ~ Notification HP1-3, Notification HP2-1 to Notification HP2-3, Notification HP3-1 to Notification HP3-3, Notification HP4-1 to Notification HP4-3, or determined in step S558 In accordance with the temporary stop symbol or the like, the decorative symbol variation process in step S162 shown in FIG. 52 is executed in accordance with the symbol variation control pattern determined in step S517 in FIG. Thus, based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After all the decorative symbols are changed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is possible to execute a “pseudo-continuous” specific effect in which the effect display changed again is performed a predetermined number of times. Then, in response to the determination that the reach state is set in step S268 shown in FIG. 44, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A set in step S270 for use in the determination in step S273. ~ 135C, any of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after executing the specific effect of "pseudo-continuous" Table data is configured so that it can be determined. In this way, for example, it varies depending on the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the reach state instead of the type of effect operation in the specific effect such as whether or not to execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. By determining the variation pattern type using the decision table that classifies the pattern type, it is possible to prevent the type of production operation in reach production from being biased to a certain type of production operation unlike the design. It is possible to improve amusement entertainment by executing a large production operation at a predetermined rate close to the design.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, for example, the CPU 103 opens the big prize opening in step S251 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the maximum number of times is set to “15”, the processing of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has set the maximum number of winning prize opening number to “2” in step S251 shown in FIG. Then, the process is controlled to the two round big hit state by executing the processing of steps S114 to S117 shown in FIG. Then, based on the fact that the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S249 shown in FIG. 42, the big hit variation pattern type set in step S262 for use in the determination in step S273 shown in FIG. In the tables 132D, 132H, and 132I, for example, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 variation pattern type is “accurate”. The table data is configured so as to include a variation pattern type different from the case of other than the above. In this way, when the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is determined that the variation pattern type or the fluctuation pattern is different from that other than “surprise accuracy”. Despite being controlled in the round big hit state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by performing the same production operation as in the case of being controlled in the 15 round big hit state.

  Based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 executes the small hit release pre-processing in step S118 and the small hit release process in step S119 shown in FIG. Similar to the two round big hit state, the special variable winning device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player, and a variable winning operation is executed. Then, when the small hit gaming state is ended, for example, by not changing the state of the probability change flag or the short time flag in the small hit end processing of step S120 shown in FIG. 40, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed. . Thereby, even when the normal state continues, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for being controlled to the probability variation state and improve the game entertainment.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 10 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 11 (B), and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. The table data is configured to include a variation pattern type common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the game is controlled to the big hit state or the small hit game state depending on the variation pattern type, and the expectation for being controlled to the probable state is maintained. Can improve the game entertainment. In addition, when the variable display result is “small hit” and when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is possible to determine the common variation pattern type, so that the variable pattern can be determined Regardless of whether the display result is “small hit” or the big hit type is “surprise”, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced. .

  When the big hit type is “probable”, for example, the production control CPU 120 determines in step S508 or S509 shown in FIG. 54 whether the variation pattern is a plurality of types, and finally stops according to the determination result. The decorative design that is the design is determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise”, various combinations of confirmed decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed as a variable display result, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of jackpot types are selected based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. The table data is configured so that the rate at which the big hit type is determined to be “accurate” differs from the case of determining whether or not. Thereby, the player's expectation for being controlled to the two round big hit state according to which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied can be made different, and the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, when the second start condition is satisfied, the big hit type is not determined to be “surprising accuracy”, so that the big start winning opening is easily controlled in the wide open state such as the probability changing state or the short time state. It is possible to prevent the gaming interests from deteriorating when the type is “accurate”, and it is possible to increase the frequency at which award balls are paid out in the probability variation state or the short time state.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the processes of steps S504, S523, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 53 based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. 54, by executing the processing of steps S510, S512, S513 shown in FIG. 54, the final decorative symbols that become the final stop symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Decide for each. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the specific effect by executing the process of step S558 shown in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S576 shown in FIG. 57 to determine the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect operation in the changing promotion effect. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Deciding the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the plurality of decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side. Can do.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 55 when the specific effect of “pseudo ream” is executed, thereby combining the temporary stop symbols that become one of the spurious chance chances GC1 to GC8. To decide. Thereby, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by performing various presentation operations while preventing an increase in control burden for controlling the progress of the game by the CPU 103 or the like on the main board 11 side.

  In response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state, the effect control CPU 120 first uses the final stop symbol determining table 162A in the process of step S506 shown in FIG. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C to be stopped are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the ornament symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last is determined. Further, in response to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, the effect control CPU 120, in the process of step S505 shown in FIG. 53, the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right appearance determination table. By determining the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed with reference to 161, the combination of reach and jackpot is not achieved, and even if it is not the reach combination or jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances shown in FIG. GC1 to GC8, development chance items HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 3B, sudden chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 3C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Determine the combination of finalized decorative symbols. Thereby, it can prevent giving a player a misunderstanding about whether a special effect is performed.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control is the “first probability variation” jackpot type capable of executing the promotion effect during the change, the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination in step S513 shown in FIG. 54 is displayed. decide. Then, in step S574 of FIG. 57, it is determined whether to execute the changing promotion effect by referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. At this time, if it is determined that the changing promotion effect is to be executed, the decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to in step S576 by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. The decoration design to be temporarily stopped by the promotion effect during change is determined. Thus, even when the “first probability change” jackpot type that can execute the changing promotion effect is provided, a case where the changing promotion effect is executed and a case where the changing promotion effect is not executed are provided. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by enabling various performance operations while preventing an increase in the control burden for controlling the progress of the game.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the final decorative symbol that will be the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination in step S512 of FIG. 54 when it is the “third probability variation” jackpot type that executes the jackpot promotion effect. . As a result, it is difficult to recognize whether or not to be controlled to the probable change state from the variable display result of the decorative symbol when the notification effect that the probable change state is entered after the control to the big hit gaming state is started. Thus, it is possible to enhance the effect of the notification effect and improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. In the above embodiment, the total number of changes, which is the total value of the number of executions of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous change performed in the meantime, is the total number of changes provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. It has been described that the counter is counted on the main board 11 side and is notified to the effect control board 12 side by the change frequency notification command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total number of fluctuations may be counted on the side of the effect control board 12. In this case, since the total number of fluctuations is not counted on the main substrate 11 side, the decision table stored in the ROM 101 includes hit variation pattern decision table 237A as shown in FIGS. 64 (A) and 64 (B) and FIG. 237C and the loss variation patterns 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B) may be included.

  Then, on the side of the production control board 12, for example, the production control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a total variation number counter, and may be updated by, for example, the command analysis processing in step S405. Specifically, it is only necessary to execute the total fluctuation number update process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67 in the command analysis process of step S405. In the total variation count update process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, checking the effect control command stored in the effect control command reception buffer. At this time, if no variation pattern designation command is received (step S171; No), the total variation number updating process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S171 that a variation pattern designation command has been received (step S171; Yes), the variation of the decorative pattern including the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation in the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is performed. The number of times (total number of fluctuations) is specified (step S172). At this time, for example, the variation patterns designated by the variation pattern designation command are non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-7, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1. , Non-reach PC1-2, normal PA2-1, normal PA2-3, super PA3-1, super PA3-5, super PA4-1, super PA4-5, super PA5-1, super PB3-1, super PB3- 5, Super PB4-1, Super PB5-1, Super PC3-1, Super PC3-3, Super PC4-1, Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1, Super PE1-1, Super PF1-2, Special PG1- 1, Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1, Special PG2-3, Special PG3-1, Special PG3- In the case of either of the total variation in the number of times it is identified as "1". When the variation pattern determined in step S276 is any one of non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, and special PG1-2, the total number of variations is “2”. Identified. Further, the variation pattern determined in step S276 is super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB3-3, super PB4-3, super PB5- 3 or special PG1-3, it is specified that the total number of fluctuations is “3”. Then, the variation patterns determined in step S276 are super PA3-4, super PA3-9, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PA5-4, super PB3-4, super PB4-4, super PB5- 4 or super PF1-1, it is specified that the total number of fluctuations is “4”.

  Subsequently, the total variation count specified in step S172 and the total variation count count value are added to calculate an addition value (step S173), and it is determined whether or not the addition value is “4” or less. (Step S174). At this time, if the added value is larger than “4” (step S174; No), the total variation count specified in step S172 is set in the total variation count counter and the total variation count value is updated (step S175). ). Thereafter, the notification waiting flag is cleared and turned off (step S176), and the previous notification buffer value is set to “0” (step S177).

  Thus, when the added value is larger than “4”, the notification waiting flag is cleared and turned off, and the previous notification buffer value is set to “0”. When the execution of is started, the display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the like are notified of the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation. Not done. As a result, it is possible to execute variable display of decorative designs that are not related to the previous variable display of decorative symbols.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S174 that the added value is “4” or less (step S174; Yes), the added value is set in the total variation counter and the total variation count value is updated. (Step S178). Thus, when the added value is “4” or less, the notification waiting flag is not cleared and turned off, and the previous notification buffer value is not set to “0”. When the execution of variable display is started, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation by the display of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc. Is notified. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative design with a relation to the previous variable display of the decorative design.

  After executing any one of steps S177 and S178, for example, a counter initialization flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set (step S179). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 45B, the variation patterns designated by the variation pattern designation command are non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach. When it is other than reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2, or when the total number of stored storages notified by the stored storage number notification command is "0", one of steps S175 and S178 The counter initialization flag is set to the on state when the total variation count value updated at (4) is “4”, otherwise it is cleared to the off state. Thereafter, if the counter initialization flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on in the decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 shown in FIG. 52, the total variation count value is updated to “0”. The

  As an example, the total fluctuation count count value is set after the variable display of the decorative pattern that does not execute the reach effect is executed after executing the specific effect of the “pseudo-run” with the execution frequency of the pseudo continuous change of one. In the case of “2”, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command determined to be received in step S171 shown in FIG. 67 is normal PA2-1, normal PA2-3, normal PA2-5, normal PA2-7, Super PA3-1, Super PA3-5, Super PA4-1, Super PA4-5, Super PA5-1, Super PB3-1, Super PB3-5, Super PB4-1, Super PB5-1, Super PC3-1, Super PC3-3, Super PC4-1, Super PC4-2, Super PD1-1, Super When the variation pattern is to execute the reach effect without executing the “pseudo-ream” specific effect such as PE1-1 or Super PF1-2, the total number of changes is specified as “1” in step S172, Since the addition value “3” is calculated in step S173, the total variation count value is updated to “3” in step S178.

  If the previous notification buffer value is “3”, the notification pattern of notification HP1-3 is determined in step S546 shown in FIG. Also, in the notice effect setting process of step S516 shown in FIG. 53, since the total variation count value is “3”, the notice pattern of notice YP1-2 is determined.

  Subsequently, in the process of step S517 shown in FIG. 53, corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during change determined in step S574 shown in FIG. Any one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. Also, since the notification HP1-3 notification pattern is determined in step S514 shown in FIG. 53 and the total variation count value is “3”, the notification effect control pattern of notification CHP1-3-2 is used as the usage pattern. Selected and set. Furthermore, since the notice pattern of the notice YP1-2 is determined in step S516, the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  In the process of step S519, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in any of the symbol variation control patterns set in step S517 is supplied to the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols is started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the apparatus 5.

  In this way, when variable display of decorative symbols is started, a voice control command corresponding to the voice control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CHP1-3-2 set in step S517 is given by the voice control board 13. Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a lamp control command corresponding to the lamp control data included in the notification effect control pattern of the notification CHP1-3-2 is supplied to the lamp control. Two of the three game effect lamps 9 are turned on by being supplied to the substrate 14 or the like. In addition, a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the notice effect control pattern of the notice CYP1-2 is supplied to the display control unit 123, and the second step is performed in the display area of the image display device 5. The effect image is displayed.

  In this way, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started following the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the reach effect is not executed after the specific effect of the “pseudo continuous” having the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation of 1 is executed, The notification effect control pattern of notification CHP1-3-2 is selected as the usage pattern in correspondence with the notification pattern of notification HP1-3 determined in step S546 shown in 55 and the total variation count value “3”. By being set, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 can be output in the same manner as when the execution of the third pseudo continuous variation is started in the specific effect of “pseudo continuous”. Lighting etc. is executed. In this manner, the player can be notified of the total number of fluctuations accurately by executing sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the like in a manner determined based on the total fluctuation number count value. can do.

  In the process of step S179 shown in FIG. 44, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1. -2, if it is other than non-reach PC 1-1, non-reach PC 1-2, or if the total pending storage number notified by the pending storage count notification command is “0”, in either step S175 or S178 When the updated total variation count value is “4”, the counter initialization flag is set to the on state. If the counter initialization flag is turned on in the decorative symbol variation end process of step S163 shown in FIG. 52, the total variation count value is updated to “0”.

  Thus, the variation patterns designated by the variation pattern designation command are non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3, non-reach PA1-5, non-reach PB1-1, non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1. In the case of other than non-reach PC1-2, since the total variation count value is updated to “0” after the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, the reach effect is executed to confirm the reach combination. After the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the fixed decorative symbol that configures any of the determined decorative symbols constituting any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 or the odd chance symbol TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed, It is possible to prevent an unnatural notification from appearing as if pseudo-variation starts at the start of variable display of the decorative pattern. Regardless of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the reach effect is executed in step S179 by clearing the counter initialization flag and setting it to the OFF state. After the confirmed decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are stopped and displayed, or the confirmed decorative symbols composing any of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 or the confirmed chance symbols TC1 to TC4 are displayed. After the stop display, at the start of variable display of the next decorative design, a notification may be made as if the pseudo continuous variation is started.

  In addition, when the total number of reserved memories notified by the reserved memory number notification command is “0”, by updating the total variation count value to “0”, the interval after the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished is set. It is possible to prevent an unnatural notification as if the pseudo continuous fluctuation is started. Furthermore, when the total variation count value updated in either step S175 or S178 is “4”, the total variation count count value is updated to “0”, so that it may be a normal pseudo continuous variation. It is possible to prevent an unnatural notification from being performed as if the fourth pseudo continuous fluctuation is not started.

  In the above embodiment, the special winning opening open designation command and the special winning opening open designated command are either the 15 round big hit state, the 2 round big hit state or the small win gaming state. Correspondingly, it has been described that separate commands are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the special winning opening opening designation command or the special winning opening open designation command, the gaming state is 15 round big hit state, or the two round big hit state and small hit game. A common command may be used regardless of any of the states. This makes it possible to reduce the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not the variable display result of the special figure game using the first special figure is controlled to the big hit gaming state as “big hit”, and the variable display result is set to the “small hit” state to enter the small hit gaming state. Whether to control to the big hit gaming state by setting the variable display result of the special figure game using the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure referred to for determining whether or not to control as "big hit" It has been described that the second special figure display result determination table 130B referred to for determining whether or not is provided separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display result of the special figure game using the first special figure is set to “big hit” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result is set to “small”. To determine whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state as "winning", or to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" variable display result of the special figure game using the second special figure, A common special figure display result determination table may be referred to. In this case, in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 42, after setting the variable symbol designation buffer value in either step S237 or S244, a common special symbol display result determination table is set. After that, the CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination read out in either of steps S235 and S242 is What is necessary is just to determine whether it corresponds with big hit determination value data, and whether it corresponds with small hit determination value data.

  In the specific embodiment, in the specific effect setting process shown in FIG. 55, when it is determined in step S546 that the notification waiting flag is on, or in step S548, the previous notification buffer value is other than “0”. If it is determined, even if the variation pattern does not always execute the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the notification pattern is determined in step S553, etc. The description is given on the assumption that a notification effect is performed as if a specific effect of “pseudo ream” is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When it is determined in step S546 that the notification waiting flag is ON, or in step S548, it is determined that the previous notification buffer value is other than “0”. In such a case, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a predetermined random number for notification effect execution determination from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 and referring to a predetermined notification effect execution determination table In combination with the previous variable display of decorative symbols, it may be determined whether or not to perform a notification effect as if a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is being executed. As an example, when the variable display result specified by the change pattern designation command or the variable display result notification command is “losing”, the notification effect execution decision is made rather than when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. You may set so that the allocation corresponding to the determination result that the alerting | reporting effect in a table is not performed increases. With this setting, when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” rather than when the variable display result is “losing”, it is as if “pseudo” is combined with the variable display of the previous decorative design. It is possible to increase the rate at which the notification effect is performed as if the “ream” specific effect is being executed. As a result, the greater the total number of changes until the reach effect is executed based on the variable display state of the decorative symbol being reached, the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). can do.

  If it is determined in step S546 shown in FIG. 55 that the notification waiting flag is ON, or if it is determined in step S548 that the previous notification buffer value is other than “0”, the predetermined continuation is performed. Only when the condition is satisfied, a notification effect as if a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is being executed may be performed in combination with the previous variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, even if it is determined in step S521 shown in FIG. 53 that the total number of reserved storage is other than “0” and the total number of fluctuations is determined to be other than “4” in step S522, step S505 is also performed. When the process proceeds to step S505, it is a condition that the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination determined in step S505 is a specific stop symbol such as a stop symbol similar to any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. In addition, a notification effect as if a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is being executed may be performed in combination with the previous variable display of decorative symbols.

  Further, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which various chances such as the pseudo chances GC1 to GC8, the development chances HC1 to HC8, and the chances of success TC1 to TC4 are not defined, the determination is made in step S505. In addition, regardless of which stop symbol is the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination, the notification effect is performed as if a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is being executed in combination with the variable display of the previous decorative symbol. May be.

  In the above embodiment, in the notice effect of “step-up image”, the effect image indicating “sun” is displayed as the effect image of the first step, and the effect image indicating “cloud” is displayed as the effect image of the second step. In the above description, the effect image indicating “thunder” is displayed as the effect image of the third step. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the effect image of the second step, an effect image in which the sun is gradually clouded and the sun is finally hidden in the clouds is displayed. As the effect image of three steps, an effect image in which the background is gradually darkened and lightning finally falls from the clouds may be displayed.

  Further, in the notice effect of “step-up image”, it has been described that a plurality of kinds of effect images can be switched at the start of variable display of decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous change, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of types of effect images may be switched during a decorative symbol variable display in which a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed or during execution of a pseudo-continuous change.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the notice effect setting process in step S516 shown in FIG. 53, the processes of steps S504, S523, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 53, the processes of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 54, the process of step S558 shown in FIG. 55, and the steps shown in FIG. It has been described that the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined by executing the process of S576. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an effect operation that becomes a notice effect during variable display of decorative symbols by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the effect operation, for example. The determination as to whether or not to execute, the determination of any one of a plurality of effects as the notice effect, and the determination of the decorative pattern to be stopped may be executed in a shared manner.

  As an example, a display control board 16 as shown in FIG. 68 is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. On the display control board 16, a display control CPU 140, a ROM 141, a RAM 142, a random number circuit 143, and an I / O 144 are mounted. In this case, since the display control CPU 140 mounted on the display control board 16 executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The displayed control unit 123 may not be provided. In the display control board 16, for example, the display control CPU 140 executes a program read from the ROM 141, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU 140 reads fixed data from the ROM 141, the display control CPU 140 writes various variation data to the RAM 142 and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU 140 stores the RAM 142 in the RAM 142. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, display operation CPU 140 receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from outside of display control board 16 via I / O 144, display control CPU 140 I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board 16 via O144 is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU 140, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, etc., the notice effect in step S516 shown in FIG. By performing the setting process, it may be determined which one of a plurality of types of effect operations that will be a notice effect. Alternatively, the display control CPU 140 performs the processes of steps S504, S523, S505, and S506 shown in FIG. 53, the processes of steps S510, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 54, the process of step S558 shown in FIG. By executing at least a part of the processing of step S576, all or all of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R or A part may be determined. The display control CPU 140 may execute any part of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. The sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal and an electrical decoration signal from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In the above-described embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are not equipped with a microcomputer including a control CPU and the like, but the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. Thus, processing for controlling various effects such as output control of sound and sound effects and lighting control of lamps, decoration LEDs, and the like is performed. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 2, the processing executed by the CPU 120 for effect control in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is performed. Any part of them may be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like, is executed on any control board. Any combination may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 9, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type with respect to the jackpot type of “surprise” The case where -1 is not assigned has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. May be. In this case, depending on whether the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”, the number of random number values MR2-1 for determining the big hit type assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” is varied. Thus, when determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition, and determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. Depending on the case, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “accurate” may be different.

  In the above embodiment, the variation patterns classified by the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the variable display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. The table data has been described as being configured so that it can be determined as one of the types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the table can be determined as any one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of a predetermined effect operation such as a specific effect of “Development Opportunity” and a promotion effect during change. Data may be configured.

  In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the start winning memory display area 5H, blue display is performed when the first start condition is satisfied, and red display is performed when the second start condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a round symbol is displayed when the first starting condition is satisfied, and a triangular symbol is displayed when the second starting condition is satisfied. The symbol may be displayed. Alternatively, a number indicating the number of times each of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied may be displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the above embodiment, when the production control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the reach combination in step S506 shown in FIG. 53, the stop is aligned with the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The decorative symbols to be displayed are determined, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It was explained that the difference in design was also determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display area 5C stops display, and the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R stop display. For example, the CPU 103 may determine the design difference from the decorative design on the main board 11 side along with the determination of the variation pattern, and notify the effect control board 12 side by a predetermined effect control command.

  In the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol of the non-reach combination in step S505 shown in FIG. 53, refer to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left and right appearance determination table 161. In the above description, the determined decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are individually determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after determining the fixed decorative symbol in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, the determined decorative symbol and the “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas are displayed. You may make it determine the symbol difference with the fixed decoration symbol in 5C, 5R with reference to a predetermined | prescribed determination table.

  In the above embodiment, when executing the changing promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 as shown in FIG. 32 in step S576 shown in FIG. When the symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are determined so that the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become the determined decorative symbols that constitute the normal jackpot combination, the determined decorative A description has been given assuming that a normal symbol different from the symbol can be determined as a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 become a fixed ornament symbol constituting a normal jackpot combination, the same normal symbol as the fixed ornament symbol However, it may be determined as a decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. As an example, in the temporary stop symbol determination table 169, any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 is displayed. In the case of the above, all of the random numbers SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect are assigned to any of the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” that are the same as the final stop symbol. The table data only needs to be configured so that the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are the same as the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3. .

  In the above embodiment, as the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 40, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44 is executed regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied, a process different from each other is executed, and the variation pattern type is selected from a plurality of types. It is also possible to determine whether or not one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In this case, the process for determining the variation pattern type and the process for determining the variation pattern are varied depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while the variation pattern type The numerical data indicating the random number value SR3 for determination and the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the variation pattern are common numerical data regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied. May be used.

  For example, as a variation pattern type determination table such as a big hit variation pattern type determination table, a small hit variation pattern type determination table, a reach variation pattern type determination table, or a non-reach variation pattern type determination table, the first start condition and the second Depending on which of the start conditions is satisfied, different allocation of the random value SR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type may be prepared in advance. Then, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the first start condition, a variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the establishment of the first start condition is selected as a use table, and a random value for determining the variation pattern type Based on SR3, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types. On the other hand, in the variation pattern setting process executed in response to the establishment of the second start condition, a variation pattern type determination table that is different from the case where the first start condition is established according to the establishment of the second start condition. It may be selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types based on the common random number SR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, regarding the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, different processes are executed when the first start condition is satisfied and when the second start condition is satisfied. It may be. In this case, the process for determining whether or not to reach the reach state is made different depending on which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, while numerical data indicating the reach determination random number value MR2-2. For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Furthermore, for example, instead of the process in step S249 shown in FIG. 42 in the above embodiment, as a process of determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types, the case where the first start condition is satisfied and the second start condition Different processing may be executed depending on whether or not is established. In this case, the processing for determining the jackpot type is different depending on whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, while the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type For example, the common numerical data may be used regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state based on the fact that the big hit type becomes “surprise”, and after the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the positive change state. Explained as being. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate” or the variable display result is “small hit”, A case of “suddenly normal” may be provided. As an example, “suddenly short time” and “suddenly normal” are included in the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big jackpot”. In this case, the jackpot type determination table 131 includes table data that assigns the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type to the “suddenly short” or “sudden normal” jackpot types in accordance with the variable special figure designation buffer value. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that it may be. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. Thereby, a player's expectation with respect to the gaming state controlled after the end of the two round big hit state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  When such “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” are provided, a variation pattern type and variation pattern different from those other than “sudden shortening” and “sudden normal” may be determined. As a result, although the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, the same effect operation as in the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is performed despite being controlled to the 2 round big hit state. It can prevent the player from feeling distrust. In addition, when the big hit type is "Suddenly short" or "Suddenly normal", when the variable display result is "Small hit", or when the big hit type is "Sudden", the common variation pattern type It may be possible to make a decision. As a result, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, or the variable display result is “Small hit” or the big hit type is “Abrupt”. Regardless of whether this is the case, a common variation pattern determination table can be used, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the game state such as the probability change state or the time-short state can be controlled after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”. In the probability variation state and the short-time state, it is described that the control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility of the game ball entering the second start winning opening and easily establishing the second start condition. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state, the probability variation control is continuously performed, and the advantageous release control that increases the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening is performed. The high base state and the high probability low base state in which the probability variation control is performed but the advantageous release control is not performed may be included. Also, in the short-time state, a low-accuracy base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened and advantageous opening control is performed, and a low-accuracy low-base state where the special figure fluctuation time is shortened but advantageous opening control is not performed. May be included. As an example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, after the big hit gaming state, the high accuracy high base state and the high probability low base state It may be controlled either. As another example, depending on whether the big hit type is “first probability change” to “third probability change” or “surprise probability”, the high-accuracy high base state and the high-accuracy low base state are You may make it make the ratio controlled to either differ mutually.

  When the big hit type is “Crush Probability”, when determining the variation pattern type to be one of multiple types, whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends Accordingly, different variation pattern types may be determined. As an example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S249 shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether to control to the high probability high base state or the high probability low base state after the big hit gaming state ends. The determination process for performing is performed. At this time, when it is determined to control to the high-accuracy low base state, the big hit type such as the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1 variation pattern type is “surprise”. A common variation pattern type is determined when the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, when it is decided to control to the high-accuracy high-base state, it is dedicated only when the big hit type is “surprise” such as special CA4-2, special CB4-2, and special CC4-2. The change pattern type may be determined. As a result, when the big hit type is “surprise” and the high probability low base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display result is displayed as an effect operation during variable display of the decorative pattern or an effect operation in the two round big hit state. After the production operation common to the case of “small hit” is performed, the highly accurate and low base state can be obtained. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprising” and the high hitting high base state is reached after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit type is “accurate” as a directing operation during variable display of a decorative symbol or a two round big hit state. After the dedicated performance operation is performed only in the case of “

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are described as being prepared as separate effect control commands. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to specify a fluctuation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “small hit”, “big hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). One kind of effect control command may be used. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in step S249 shown in FIG. 42 selects any one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Based on the determination, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 sets the jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 28B in step S606 shown in FIG. 58, and step S608. In S609, it has been described that it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect may be performed by the effect control CPU 120 regardless of the determination result in the CPU 103.

  In the embodiment described above, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided. In the above description, it is assumed that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so that the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed on one predetermined effective line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three locations of “upper”, “middle”, and “lower” are provided. It is also possible that the decorative symbols can be stopped and displayed, and the finalized decorative symbols that will be the final stopped symbols are stopped and displayed on five or eight active lines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the specific effect is executed in response to the fact that the variation pattern type is determined as the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It has been described as being determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-7. That is, it has been described that the presence or absence of the specific effect is determined by determining the variation pattern type using the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of the specific effect may be determined by determining the variation pattern using the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. As an example, the table data of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is set so that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2 include the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-1. In this case, when the variation pattern type is determined to be the non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-2 variation pattern type based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the presence / absence of the specific effect is still determined. First, it is determined that the specific effect is not executed by determining the non-reach PA1-1 based on the random value MR4 for determining the change pattern, while the change pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach. Execution of a specific effect is determined by being determined as one of PA1-7.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... Display control board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121, 141 ... ROM
102, 122, 142 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124, 143 ... random number circuits 105, 125, 144 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 140 ... Display control CPU

Claims (1)

Based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the identification information is variably displayed, and after the variable display result of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result, the gaming machine controls the advantageous state advantageous to the player. And
Determining means for determining whether or not to enter the advantageous state;
In accordance with the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the identification information for decoration is started and the display result is derived and displayed. The variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed after the variable display of the identification information is started. In the meantime, the pseudo continuous variable display for executing the pseudo continuous variable display for a predetermined number of times after temporarily stopping the variable display of the decoration identification information without temporarily stopping the variable display of the identification information. Display execution means;
When the pseudo continuous variable display is executed by the pseudo continuous variable display executing means, a notice effect executing means for executing a notice effect that develops the effect in stages;
Production means capable of executing a predetermined production in a plurality of types,
Effect control means for causing the effect means to execute a predetermined effect in a manner corresponding to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variable display;
With
When the variable display of the identification information is started after the variable display result of the identification information different from the specific display result is derived and displayed, the production control means It is possible to cause the effect means to execute a predetermined effect in the same manner as when
A gaming machine characterized by that.